NEC Server 140Rc 4 User Manual
N8100-1023F/1024F  
NEC Express5800/140Rc-4  
User's Guide  
1st Edition  
10-2004  
ONL-3107cN-140Rc4-100-99-0410  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep this User’s Guide at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.  
SAFETY INDICATIONS  
Follow the instructions in this User’s Guide for your safety to use the server.  
The server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings,  
and preventive actions against such hazards.  
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them  
as well as described in this User’s Guide.  
In the User’s Guide or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of  
danger. These terms are defined as follows:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious  
personal injury.  
WARNING  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury,  
including burns, or property damage.  
CAUTION  
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols. The  
individual symbols are defined as follows:  
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard.  
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)  
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a  
particular prohibited action. (Prohibited Action)  
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a  
mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)  
(Example)  
Symbol to draw attention  
Term indicating a degree of danger  
CAUTION  
High temperature.  
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as  
hard disks are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully  
cool down before installing/removing any component.  
Symbol indicating a prohibited  
action (may not always be  
indicated)  
Description of a danger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER'S GUIDE AND WARNING  
LABELS  
Attentions  
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.  
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.  
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.  
Indicates that improper use may cause the clip of a hand.  
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.  
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.  
Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam.  
Prohibited Actions  
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire  
may be caused.  
Mandatory Action  
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be  
caused.  
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified. Make sure to  
follow the instruction.  
SAFETY INDICATIONS BY COLOR OF THE PARTS  
Only green area is available for hot swap or hot plug operation. To avoid electric shock, disconnect  
all AC cords before accessing to other parts especially blue area inside the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
CE Statement  
Warning: This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).  
BSMI Statement  
This system is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. This  
label is located on the internal CD-ROM installed in your system.  
CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
Xeon is a trademark of Intel Corporation.  
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. of the United States.  
Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
ROM-DOS is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other  
countries.  
Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of United States.  
SCSISelect is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of the United States.  
Adobe, Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States.  
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of  
their respective trademark owners.  
Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft Windows 2000 Server operating system and Microsoft Windows  
®
®
®
®
2000 Advanced Server operating system, and Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system.  
®
®
Windows 2003 stands for Microsoft Windows Server2003 Server operating system and Microsoft  
®
®
Windows Server2003 Standard Edition and Enterprise Edition. Windows NT stands for Microsoft  
®
Windows NT Server network operating system version 3.51/4.0 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation  
®
®
®
operating system version 3.51/4.0. Windows Me stands for Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition  
®
®
Operating System. Windows 98 stands for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system. Windows 95 stands  
®
®
for Microsoft Windows 95 operating system.  
®
®
Momentary voltage drop prevention:  
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a  
momentary voltage drop, an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.  
Notes:  
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of  
NEC Corporation.  
(2) The contents of this User's Guide may be revised without prior notice.  
(3) The contents of this User’s Guide shall not be copied or altered without the prior written  
permission of NEC Corporation.  
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this User’s Guide. If  
you notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this User’s Guide, contact the service  
representative where you purchased this product.  
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or  
consequential damages arising from the use of this User’s Guide regardless of Item (4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i
PREFACE  
Welcome to the NEC Express5800/140Rc-4 server.  
The NEC Express5800 server holds powerful performance and employs the latest technology to  
implement a computer for the next generation. With its potential capabilities, the server may be  
used as the workstation PC that configures a client-server system and provides high-speed  
processing and superior reliability.  
Read this User’s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the server and appreciate its  
functions to the maximum extent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE  
This User’s Guide is a guide for proper setup and use of the server.  
This User’s Guide also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may  
arise during setup or operation of the server. Keep this manual for future use.  
The following describes how to proceed with this User’s Guide.  
How to Use This User's Guide  
To aid you in finding information quickly, this User’s Guide contains the following information:  
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server  
includes information that needs attention to use the server. Make sure to read this chapter  
before setting up and using the server.  
Chapter 2 General Description  
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its  
components, handling of the floppy disk and CD-ROM drives. It also includes  
requirements and advisory information for transfer and disposal of the server.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server  
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, assemble the rack-mount subsystem,  
make cable connections, and power on your system.  
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server  
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup  
Utility and the Adaptec Configuration Utility, which is used to configure SCSI devices in your  
system. This chapter also provides information on baseboard jumper settings.  
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
describes how to install the operating system.  
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities  
describes how to install the utilities for the server. It also includes a description on using  
the attached CD-ROM "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER".  
Chapter 7 Maintenance  
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the  
server. This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server.  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting  
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.  
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server  
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor,  
optional memory, optional add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power  
supply.  
Appendix A Specification  
provides specifications for your server.  
Appendix B Other Precautions  
provides supplementary notes on using the server.  
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address  
provides a list of factory-set IRQs and I/O port addresses assigned.  
Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003  
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup.  
Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003. See  
Chapter 5 for details.  
Appendix E Installing Windows 2000  
describes how to install Microsoft Windows 2000 without using Express Setup. Using the  
Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows 2000. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table  
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Text Conventions  
The following conventions are used throughout this User’s Guide. For safety symbols, see  
"SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.  
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
Notes give important information about the material being described.  
NOTE:  
IN THE PACKAGE  
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make  
sure that you have everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any  
component missing or damaged, contact your service representative.  
„ Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need  
them to install an optional device or troubleshoot the server, as well as to set it up.  
„ Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the  
master disk in a designated place, and use its copy.  
„ Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system  
environment. If you find anything unclear, immediately ask your service representative  
for help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
CONTENTS  
Preface..............................................................................................................................................i  
About This User's Guide..................................................................................................................ii  
In the Package.................................................................................................................................iii  
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server........................................................................ 1-1  
Warning Labels.............................................................................................................................1-2  
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................1-3  
General.....................................................................................................................................1-3  
Notes on Installing and Accessing the Rack Cabinet ...............................................................1-5  
Power Supply and Power Cord Use .........................................................................................1-6  
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection....................................................................1-7  
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices...........................................................................1-9  
During Operation ...................................................................................................................1-11  
For Proper Operation..................................................................................................................1-12  
Transfer to Third Party ...............................................................................................................1-14  
Consumables...............................................................................................................................1-15  
Disposal of the Server.................................................................................................................1-15  
User Support...............................................................................................................................1-16  
Chapter 2 General Description..................................................................................... 2-1  
Overview ......................................................................................................................................2-2  
Top View ..................................................................................................................................2-3  
Front View................................................................................................................................2-4  
Front View (with Front Bezel Removed) .................................................................................2-5  
Front View (Switches and Lamps) ...........................................................................................2-6  
Rear View.................................................................................................................................2-7  
Internal View............................................................................................................................2-9  
Electronics Bay ......................................................................................................................2-10  
Baseboard...............................................................................................................................2-11  
Processor Board .....................................................................................................................2-12  
Memory Board .......................................................................................................................2-13  
Standard Features .......................................................................................................................2-14  
Power Supplies.......................................................................................................................2-15  
Peripheral Bays ......................................................................................................................2-15  
Memory Mirroring Feature ....................................................................................................2-16  
Online Sparing Memory Feature............................................................................................2-16  
SAF-TE Logic........................................................................................................................2-17  
System Cooling ......................................................................................................................2-17  
System Board Features...........................................................................................................2-18  
Security ..................................................................................................................................2-22  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ....................................................................................................2-23  
NEC ESMPRO.......................................................................................................................2-24  
Off-line Maintenance Utility..................................................................................................2-24  
System Diagnostic Utility ......................................................................................................2-24  
NEC Management Workstation Application (NEC MWA)....................................................2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Using Your Server...................................................................................................................... 2-25  
Front Bezel ............................................................................................................................ 2-25  
POWER Switch..................................................................................................................... 2-26  
POST ..................................................................................................................................... 2-27  
SLEEP Switch ....................................................................................................................... 2-32  
Floppy Disk Drive................................................................................................................. 2-33  
CD-ROM Drive..................................................................................................................... 2-35  
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server ................................................................................3-1  
Setup Flow................................................................................................................................... 3-2  
Selecting a Site............................................................................................................................. 3-3  
Installation............................................................................................................................... 3-3  
Installation of Rack.................................................................................................................. 3-3  
Unpacking the System ................................................................................................................. 3-5  
Assembling the Rack-mount System ........................................................................................... 3-6  
ESD Precaution ....................................................................................................................... 3-7  
Checking Components............................................................................................................. 3-7  
Required Tools......................................................................................................................... 3-8  
Installation Procedure.............................................................................................................. 3-9  
Removal Procedure ............................................................................................................... 3-22  
Connecting Peripheral Devices.................................................................................................. 3-24  
Connection to Serial Ports..................................................................................................... 3-26  
Connection to External SCSI Devices................................................................................... 3-32  
Connecting Power Cord............................................................................................................. 3-33  
Turning On the Server................................................................................................................ 3-35  
Installing Operating System....................................................................................................... 3-37  
Installing Utilities ...................................................................................................................... 3-37  
Making Backup Copies of System Information......................................................................... 3-37  
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server..............................................................................4-1  
System BIOS ~ SETUP ~ ............................................................................................................ 4-1  
Starting SETUP Utility............................................................................................................ 4-2  
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage .................................................................... 4-3  
Configuration Examples.......................................................................................................... 4-4  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions........................................................................................... 4-9  
SCSI BIOS ~ SCSISelect ~........................................................................................................ 4-35  
Using SCSISelect Utility ....................................................................................................... 4-35  
Configuring SCSI Controller on Baseboard.......................................................................... 4-36  
Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board .................................................................. 4-44  
Configuring Baseboard Jumpers................................................................................................ 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup............................... 5-1  
About Express Setup ....................................................................................................................5-2  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003..................................................................................................5-4  
Installation Notice ....................................................................................................................5-4  
The Flow of Setup....................................................................................................................5-7  
Installing the Windows Server 2003.........................................................................................5-8  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.....................................................................................5-12  
Setting for Solving Problems .................................................................................................5-15  
Installing Maintenance Utilities .............................................................................................5-18  
Updating the System ..............................................................................................................5-19  
Making Backup Copies of System Information .....................................................................5-19  
Exceptional Setup...................................................................................................................5-20  
Microsoft Windows 2000 ...........................................................................................................5-21  
Installation Notice ..................................................................................................................5-21  
The Flow of Setup..................................................................................................................5-25  
Installing the Windows 2000..................................................................................................5-26  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.....................................................................................5-30  
Setting for Solving Problems .................................................................................................5-34  
Installing Maintenance Utilities .............................................................................................5-37  
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack - ....................................................................5-38  
Making Backup Copies of System Information .....................................................................5-38  
Exceptional Setup...................................................................................................................5-39  
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities....................................................................... 6-1  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................6-2  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console.............................................6-4  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console ........................................6-10  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)..............................6-13  
Configuration Diskette Creator...................................................................................................6-14  
NEC ESMPRO ...........................................................................................................................6-19  
Functions and Features...........................................................................................................6-19  
NEC MWA .................................................................................................................................6-20  
Servers to be Remotely Managed by MWA...........................................................................6-20  
Precautions.............................................................................................................................6-20  
Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console ....................................6-21  
Power Console Plus....................................................................................................................6-26  
Major Functions .....................................................................................................................6-26  
Components............................................................................................................................6-27  
Server Setup ...........................................................................................................................6-29  
Management PC Setup...........................................................................................................6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
Chapter 7 Maintenance..................................................................................................7-1  
Making Backup Copies................................................................................................................ 7-1  
Cleaning....................................................................................................................................... 7-2  
Cleaning the Server ................................................................................................................. 7-3  
Cleaning the Interior................................................................................................................ 7-4  
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse ................................................................................................ 7-5  
Cleaning CD-ROM.................................................................................................................. 7-6  
System Diagnostics...................................................................................................................... 7-7  
Test Items................................................................................................................................. 7-7  
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics........................................................................... 7-8  
Relocating/Storing the Server .....................................................................................................7-11  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................8-1  
System Viewers............................................................................................................................ 8-2  
Lamps .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3  
POWER/SLEEP Lamp............................................................................................................ 8-3  
STATUS Lamp ........................................................................................................................ 8-4  
DISK ACCESS Lamp.............................................................................................................. 8-6  
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp ................................................................................................. 8-6  
UID Lamp................................................................................................................................ 8-7  
Access Lamps.......................................................................................................................... 8-7  
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp)..................................................................................... 8-8  
AC Standby Lamp ................................................................................................................... 8-9  
Power Lamp .......................................................................................................................... 8-10  
LAN Connector Lamps ..........................................................................................................8-11  
PCI Slot Lamps...................................................................................................................... 8-12  
FAN Fault Lamps .................................................................................................................. 8-13  
Error Messages .......................................................................................................................... 8-14  
Error Messages after Power-on ............................................................................................. 8-14  
POST Error Messages ........................................................................................................... 8-15  
Beep Codes............................................................................................................................ 8-21  
Solving Problems....................................................................................................................... 8-22  
Problems with Server ............................................................................................................ 8-22  
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER............................................................................ 8-32  
Problems with Express Setup ................................................................................................ 8-33  
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration .................................................................. 8-36  
Problems with Master Control Menu .................................................................................... 8-36  
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator ..................................................................... 8-37  
Collecting Event Log................................................................................................................. 8-38  
Collect Configuration Information............................................................................................. 8-39  
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information.......................................................................... 8-40  
Memory Dump........................................................................................................................... 8-40  
Preparing for Memory Dumping ........................................................................................... 8-40  
Saving the Dump File............................................................................................................ 8-41  
Recovery for Windows 2000...................................................................................................... 8-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
Off-Line Maintenance Utility .....................................................................................................8-44  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility...............................................................................8-45  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility ...............................................................................8-46  
Resetting the Server....................................................................................................................8-47  
Forced Shutdown........................................................................................................................8-47  
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server ................................................................................ 9-1  
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................9-2  
Anti-static Measures.....................................................................................................................9-3  
Preparing for Installation and Removal........................................................................................9-4  
Tools and Supplies Needed...........................................................................................................9-5  
Device Installation or Removal Procedure ...................................................................................9-6  
Hard Disk Drive .......................................................................................................................9-6  
Power Supply Unit .................................................................................................................9-11  
Server ~ Extending from the Rack Cabinet~..........................................................................9-15  
Front Access Cover ................................................................................................................9-17  
5.25-inch Peripheral Device...................................................................................................9-18  
Rear Access Cover .................................................................................................................9-22  
CPU Access Cover .................................................................................................................9-23  
PCI Board...............................................................................................................................9-24  
Memory Board .......................................................................................................................9-45  
DIMM ....................................................................................................................................9-47  
Processor Board Air Duct.......................................................................................................9-54  
Processor Board .....................................................................................................................9-56  
Processor (CPU).....................................................................................................................9-58  
Cable Connection .......................................................................................................................9-63  
IDE Interface..........................................................................................................................9-63  
SCSI Interface........................................................................................................................9-64  
External SCSI Cable...............................................................................................................9-69  
Serial Interface .......................................................................................................................9-71  
Appendix A Specifications............................................................................................A-1  
Appendix B Other Precautions.....................................................................................B-1  
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ......................................................................B-1  
Server Management Software .................................................................................................B-1  
Floppy Disk.............................................................................................................................B-1  
CD-ROM.................................................................................................................................B-4  
Tape Media..............................................................................................................................B-4  
Keyboard.................................................................................................................................B-5  
Mouse......................................................................................................................................B-6  
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address.........................................................................C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 ............................................................. D-1  
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 ......................................................................................D-1  
Installing Service Pack ............................................................................................................D-1  
Updating System .....................................................................................................................D-1  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as 'MAINTE_P')....................................D-1  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk............................D-1  
MO Device ..............................................................................................................................D-2  
Media such as DAT .................................................................................................................D-2  
Partition Size ...........................................................................................................................D-2  
Installing Windows Server 2003..................................................................................................D-3  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"......................D-3  
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ................................................................................D-5  
Updating the System................................................................................................................D-6  
Upgrade installation.................................................................................................................D-7  
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings...................................................................................D-9  
PROSet....................................................................................................................................D-9  
Network Driver......................................................................................................................D-10  
Re-install the Network Driver ...............................................................................................D-11  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver..........................................................................................D-11  
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ..................................................D-12  
Appendix E Installing Windows 2000...........................................................................E-1  
Before Installing Windows 2000..................................................................................................E-1  
Installing Service Pack ............................................................................................................E-1  
Updating System .....................................................................................................................E-1  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as 'MAINTE_P')....................................E-1  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk............................E-2  
MO Device ..............................................................................................................................E-2  
Media such as DAT .................................................................................................................E-2  
Partition Size ...........................................................................................................................E-3  
Installing Windows 2000 .............................................................................................................E-4  
Preparations for Installation.....................................................................................................E-4  
Creating "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER".................................E-4  
Windows 2000 Clean Installation............................................................................................E-6  
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings...................................................................................E-8  
PROSet....................................................................................................................................E-8  
Network Driver........................................................................................................................E-9  
Re-install the Network Driver ...............................................................................................E-10  
Graphics Accelerator Driver.................................................................................................. E-11  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver..........................................................................................E-11  
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) .....................................................E-12  
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table.......................................................F-1  
Hardware ................................................................................................................................. F-1  
Software................................................................................................................................... F-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Notes on Using Your Server  
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2 Notes on Using Your Server  
WARNING LABELS  
The warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to  
inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not  
intentionally remove or damage any of the labels.)  
If you find any labels totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your sales  
representative.  
The following Symbols have the  
same meaning.  
Old symbol:  
New symbol:.  
or  
Attached to the CPU access cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-3  
SAFETY NOTES  
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure  
proper and safe use of the server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.  
General  
WARNING  
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly  
affect human lives.  
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices  
concerning human lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and  
devices, aeronautics and space devices, transportation facilities and devices;  
and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. NEC assumes no liability for  
any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the server  
has been used in the above conditions.  
Do not use the server if any smoke, odor, or noise is present.  
If smoke, odor, or noise is present, immediately turn off the POWER switch and  
disconnect the power plug from the outlet, then contact your service  
representative. Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire.  
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.  
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or  
openings in the floppy disk or CD-ROM drive. Doing so may cause an electric  
shock.  
Do not use the server in any unapproved place.  
Install the server on a standard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet. Do not install the  
rack containing the server in a place inappropriate to the rack installation  
environment.  
Failure to follow these instructions may cause some bad influences to be  
imposed on your server and other systems installed on the rack and also a fire  
or personal injury due to falling of the rack may occur. For the detailed  
explanation on the place where your server should be installed and the  
earthquake-resistant construction for the rack, refer to the manual attached to  
the rack or contact your service representative.  
Always install the server on a rack conforming to the relevant standard.  
Install the server on a rack confirming to the EIA standard for the server to be  
used. Do not use the server with installed on any other rack than standard EIA  
19-inch rack or without the installation on a proper rack. Failure to follow these  
instructions may cause your server to operate incorrectly and/or personal injury  
or damages of surrounding devices to occur. Contact your service  
representative for the racks available for your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4 Notes on Using Your Server  
CAUTION  
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.  
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper  
clips) enter the server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric  
shock, a fire, or a failure of the server. When such things accidentally enter the  
server, immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-5  
Notes on Installing and Accessing the Rack Cabinet  
CAUTION  
Do not carry or install the rack cabinet only by a single person.  
More than one person is required to carry or install the rack. Failure to follow this  
instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury and/or breakages of  
surrounding devices. In particular, a high rack (such as 44U rack) is unstable if it is  
not fixed by stabilizers. More than one person must always carry or install the rack  
while they support it.  
Do not install the rack cabinet so that the load may be concentrated on a specific  
point.  
Install stabilizers on the rack so that the total load of the rack and devices mounted on  
the rack is not concentrated on a singe point or join more than one rack with each  
other to distribute the load. Failure to follow this instruction may cause the rack to  
fall to result in personal injury.  
Do not install components on the rack cabinet only by a single person.  
More than one person is required to install parts including the doors and trays for the  
rack. Failure to follow this instruction may cause some parts to fall to be broken  
and/or to result in personal injury.  
Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.  
Always pull out a device from the rack in the state that the rack is made stable (by the  
installation of stabilizers or earthquake-resistant construction).  
Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.  
Pulling out more than one device from the rack may cause the rack to be fallen.  
Only pull out a single device from the rack at a time.  
Do not provide the wiring for the rack cabinet to exceed the rating of the power  
supply.  
To prevent burns, fires, and device damages, the power supplied to the power supply  
in the rack shall not exceed the rating load of the power branch circuit. Contact your  
electric constructor or the local power company for the requirements on the wiring  
and installation of electric facilities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6 Notes on Using Your Server  
Power Supply and Power Cord Use  
WARNING  
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to follow  
this warning may cause an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Plug in to a proper power source.  
Use a proper wall outlet. Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or  
a power leak.  
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a cord that  
does not meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and  
cause a fire.  
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of  
connections.  
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may  
cause a fire.  
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect contact)  
may cause a fire. Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty  
blades of the halfway inserted plug, increasing the possibility of fire.  
Use the authorized power cord only.  
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized  
power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.  
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a  
damaged cord.  
■ Do not stretch the cord harness.  
■ Do not pinch the power cord.  
■ Do not bend the power cord.  
■ Keep chemicals away from the power cord.  
■ Do not twist the power cord.  
■ Do not place any object on the power cord.  
■ Do not bundle power cords.  
■ Do not alter, modify, or repair the power cord.  
■ Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents.  
■ Do not use any damaged power cord. (Replace a damaged power cord with  
a new one of the same specifications. Ask your service representative for  
replacement.)  
Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage.  
The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with  
this server and to use with the server, and its safety has been tested. Do not use  
the attached power cord for any other purpose. Doing so may cause a fire or an  
electric shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-7  
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection  
CAUTION  
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
Your server weighs 33 kg (depending on its hardware configuration). Carrying  
the server only by yourself may strain your back. Hold the server firmly by its  
bottom with another person to carry it. Do not hold the front bezel to lift the  
server. The front door may be disengaged from the server, causing personal  
injury.  
Do not install your server on a rack with leaving covers removed.  
Do not install your server on a rack with the cover being removed. Failure to  
follow this instruction may reduce the cooling effect in the server to result in  
some malfunction and/or dusts to enter the server to result in a fire or electric  
shock.  
Do not pinch your finger with rails or other components.  
Note sufficiently that your fingers may not be caught between a rail and another  
mechanical part or cut by a rail at installation or removal of the server from the  
rack. When unlocking the latched server in the rack cabinet, use a screwdriver  
or tools to press the release levers on the slide rail. Pressing the levers with your  
finger may cause an injury.  
Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack.  
Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack. Doing so bends  
the frame of the server. Consequently, the server cannot be pushed back into  
the rack. Placing an object on the server may also cause personal injury if the  
server drops.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified  
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire.  
■ a dusty place  
■ a humid place such as near a boiler  
■ a place exposed to direct sunlight  
■ an unstable place  
Do not use the equipment in the place where corrosive gases exist.  
Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive gases  
(sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia, ozone,  
etc) exist.  
Also, do not set it in the environment where the air (or dust) includes  
components accelerating corrosion (ex. sulfur, sodium chloride) or conductive  
metals. There is a risk of a fire due to corrosion and shorts of an internal printed  
board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8 Notes on Using Your Server  
CAUTION  
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to  
a power source.  
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power  
outlet before installing/removing any optional internal device or  
connecting/disconnecting any interface cable to/from the server. If the server  
is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source, touching an  
internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire  
resulted from a short circuit.  
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.  
Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and  
connector before connecting a cable. Using an authorized cable or connecting  
a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.  
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.  
■ Do not use any damaged cable connector.  
■ Do not step on the cable.  
■ Do not place any object on the cable.  
■ Do not use the server with loose cable connections.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-9  
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other  
than described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an  
electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server.  
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
A laser beam used in the CD-ROM drive is harmful to the eyes. Do not look  
into or insert a mirror into the drive while the drive is powered. If a laser beam  
is caught in your eyes, you may lose your eyesight (the laser beam is invisible).  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Your server contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Danger of  
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the lithium close to a fire  
or in the water may cause an explosion.  
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery,  
contact your service representative to replace only with the same or equivalent  
type recommended by NEC. Do not disassemble the server to replace or  
recharge the battery by yourself.  
Disconnect all the power plugs before accessing inside the server, or connecting  
the peripherals.  
The server has two power cords.  
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the all power plugs from a  
power outlet before cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices.  
Touching any internal device of the server with its power cords connected to a  
power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off-powered.  
Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug  
with a dry cloth. Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty  
plug, which may cause a fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10 Notes on Using Your Server  
CAUTION  
Hot surface  
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as  
hard disks are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully  
cool down before installing/removing any component.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Always install a board firmly. An incompletely installed board may cause a  
contact failure, resulting in smoking or fire.  
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.  
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with the protective cap  
to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards. When removing the power  
supply cable connector from the internal devices, attach the protective cap to the  
connector. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Do not touch any electrical components inside the server during the hot-swap  
replacement.  
All power flows inside the server while the hot-swap replaceable components  
(PCI add-in cards, hard disk, cooling fan, and power supply). Do not touch the  
electrical components inside the server to avoid an electric shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-11  
During Operation  
CAUTION  
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.  
Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet when a thunderstorm is  
approaching. If it starts thundering before you disconnect the all power plugs,  
do not touch any part of the server including the cables. Failure to follow this  
warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Keep animals away from the server.  
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Do not place any object on top of the server.  
An object placed on top of the server may fall down, resulting in damage to your  
property around the server.  
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server.  
Turn off the cellular phone or pager. Radio interference may cause  
malfunctions of the server.  
Do not remove the cooling fans.  
Only an authorized NEC service technician can remove the cooling fans from  
the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12 Notes on Using Your Server  
FOR PROPER OPERATION  
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server. Use of the server ignoring the  
notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server.  
„ Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation. For details,  
see Chapter 3, "Setting Up Your Server."  
„ Do not delete the hard disk partition exclusively provided for maintenance of the server  
although it may appear on the OS.  
„ Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the  
server and peripheral devices.  
„ Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting  
the floppy disk.  
„ The server management logic on your system board monitors and logs system voltage  
changes. When plugging the power cord to the system, you may experience 10 seconds  
delay from the time you press the POWER switch on the front panel. This is normal  
system operation and is required by the server management logic.  
„ When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back  
on.  
„ Do not turn off the server until characters following the "NEC" logo appears on the  
screen.  
„ Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.  
„ Some software includes a command to eject the CD-ROM tray. Make sure that the front  
bezel is removed before running the command. Running this command with the front  
bezel installed may cause the CD-ROM tray or the media to hit against the front bezel,  
resulting in a failure of the server  
„ Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 7 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning  
proactively prevents various failures of the server.  
„ Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is  
recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit.  
„ Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions  
is applicable.  
– After carriage of the server  
– After storage of the server  
– After the server is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition  
enduring the server operation (temperature: 10°C - 35°C, humidity: 20% - 80%)  
„ Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the system clock is  
installed in a system requiring high time precision, it is recommended to use a time server  
(NTP server).  
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of  
adjustment, contact your sales agent to ask maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-13  
„ Store the unit under the storage condition (temperature: -10°C - 55°C, humidity: 20% -  
80%, without condensation) to allow built-in devices and the unit to operate correctly in  
the next operation.  
„ Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices  
may be physically installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as a  
malfunctions of the server.  
„ NEC recommends you use NEC's genuine products. Some third-party products claim  
that they support the server. However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage  
resulted from use of such third-party products will be charged.  
„ For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a disk with  
the CD drive is not guaranteed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-14 Notes on Using Your Server  
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY  
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the  
server to a third party:  
NEC Express server  
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.  
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk  
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g.,  
customers' information or companies' management information) on the  
removed hard disk to any third parties.  
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or  
execute the "format" command of the operating system. However, the  
actual data remains written on the hard disk. Data not erased completely  
may be restored by special software and used for unexpected purposes.  
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available  
at stores) for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble  
explained above. For details on data erasure, ask your sales  
representative.  
Provided software  
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following  
requirements must be satisfied:  
„ All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be  
retained.  
„ Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each  
software application must be satisfied.  
„ Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before  
transferring the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-15  
CONSUMABLES  
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require  
replacement, such as fans, the internal CD-ROM drive, the floppy disk drive, and the mouse. For  
stable operation of the server, NEC recommends you replace these components on a regular basis.  
Consult with your service representative for replacement or the product lives.  
DISPOSAL OF THE SERVER  
Dispose the server, all the internal devices, floppy disks, and CD-ROMs according to all national  
laws and regulations.  
IMPORTANT: For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the  
baseboard of the server, consult with your service representative.  
NOTE: If the real-time clock battery on the baseboard leaches its life,  
the following message appeared on the display while running the POST.  
Contact your service representative to replace the battery.  
250 System battery is dead –Replace and run SETUP  
WARNING  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Your server contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Danger of  
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the lithium or nickel  
cadmium battery close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion.  
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the failure of lithium  
battery, contact your service representative to replace only with the same or  
equivalent type recommended by NEC. Do not disassemble the server to  
replace or recharge the battery by yourself.  
Baseboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-16 Notes on Using Your Server  
USER SUPPORT  
When the server needs after-sales service, check if the warranty is still valid, and determine which  
service is necessary as indicated on the "Certificate".  
Before Asking for Repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:  
1. Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.  
2. See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the  
recommended measure for it.  
3. Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.  
4. Check the server using a computer virus detection program. Computer virus detection  
programs are available for purchase in stores.  
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, consult with your service  
representative immediately. Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on  
the display unit before consultation, which may provide a significant help to your service  
representative.  
When Having Your Server Repaired  
Prepare the following when having your server repaired:  
„ Certificate  
„ Notes of the messages displayed on the display unit  
„ Error information*  
„ Records of the NEC Express server and peripheral equipment  
* Error information includes the Error Message shown in Chapter 8.  
Prepare the error information only when required by your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-17  
Advice for Health  
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become  
tired, which may cause disorders of your body. When you use a  
computer, observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired:  
Good Working Posture  
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a  
computer:  
• You sit on a chair with your back straight.  
• Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the  
keyboard.  
• You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.  
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part  
of your body is under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are  
most relaxed.  
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you  
operate a display unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working  
posture may cause eye strain or poor eyesight.  
Adjustment of Display Unit Angles  
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and  
vertical angles. This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from  
reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy to see. You  
will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you will feel more tired  
than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal  
and vertical angles.  
Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast  
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The  
most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the  
working environment (well-lighted room or insufficient light). Adjust  
brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to see. An  
extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.  
Adjustment of Keyboard Angle  
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an  
angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to  
operate. The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders,  
arms, and fingers.  
Cleaning of Equipment  
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a  
dusty screen. Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.  
Fatigue and Rest  
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-18 Notes on Using Your Server  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
General Description  
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It  
includes names and functions of the components and features of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2 General Description  
OVERVIEW  
Your server is a highly reliable, high-powered, fault-tolerant, high-capacity, multiprocessing server  
based on the IntelXeonProcessor MP. It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology.  
The combination of compute performance, memory capacity, and integrated I/O provides a high  
performance environment for many server market applications. These range from large  
corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic connectivity  
capability such as file and print services, e-mail, web access, web site server, etc.  
Your server is housed and available as a rack-mount system. Your server conveniently installs into  
a standard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet.  
Your server includes a 3.5-inch diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, a 3.5-inch hard disk bay, and  
removable media device bay. The 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to five 1.0-inch SCSI hard  
disk drives that can be swapped in or out of the system without powering it down, if RAID  
functionality is configured in the system.  
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional processor,  
additional memory, add-in boards and peripheral devices: tape devices, CD-ROM, and hard disk  
drives.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-3  
Top View  
2
1
1
2
Front access cover  
Open the front access cover  
• to replace any defected fan with a normal one. The fans are hot-swappable.  
Do not remove any fans which are not defected.  
If a fan is defected, do not replace it by yourself but contact your service representative to  
request the replacement.  
• to install or remove optional 5.25-inch device and change some internal cable connections.  
Rear access cover  
Open the rear access cover to install or remove optional PCI boards, optional processors and  
DIMMs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4 General Description  
Front View  
See "Lamps" described later.  
1
2
1
2
1
2
Front bezel  
Remove the front bezel when you access to the POWER/SLEEP switch, the CD-ROM drive,  
or the floppy disk drive or install or remove a hard disk drive from the 3.5-inch hard disk bay.  
The front bezel can be locked by using the attached security key.  
Key hole  
Insert the security key to lock/unlock the front bezel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-5  
Front View (with Front Bezel Removed)  
See Chapter 8 for detail information on lamp indication.  
5-1  
1-1 1-2 1-3  
5-2  
5-3  
8
6-1 6-2 6-3  
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
Power supply unit  
The power supply unit supplies DC powers to the server. The slot 1-3 is for optional slot.  
Power lamp  
When the power of the server is turned on, the lamp goes on green.  
AC Standby lamp  
If the power cord is connected to the AC inlet to supply AC power to the power supply unit, the  
lamp goes on green except for the lamp indicated AC_R. If the power system of the server is in  
the redundant function, after turning on the server, the lamp indicated AC_R goes on green.  
4
5
5.25-inch device bay  
Backup tape drives may be installed in the 5.25-inch device bay.  
CD-ROM drive  
The CD-ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD-ROM.  
5-1: Access lamp (lit orange during accessing)  
5-2: CD tray eject button  
5-3: Emergency hole  
6
3.5-inch floppy disk drive  
Insert a 3.5-inch floppy disk to the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write  
data to the disk.  
6-1: Eject button  
6-2: Disk inserting section  
6-3: Floppy disk access lamp (lit green during accessing)  
7
8
3.5-inch hard disk bay  
The 3.5-inch hard disk bay contains additional hard disk slots. Hard disks having the  
thickness of 1 inch can be inserted into the slots.  
The SCSI IDs are defined as follows:  
ID0 to ID4 from right to left  
Disk lamp (green/amber)  
The disk lamp is lit green if a hard disk installed in the server is accessed. If a hard disk is  
defected, the lamp is lit amber. During the rebuild processing, the lamp is lit green or amber  
alternately. (This occurs only in the disk array configuration.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6 General Description  
Front View (Switches and Lamps)  
See Chapter 8 for detail information on lamp indication.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
11  
12  
1
Serial port B connector  
The serial port B connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface.  
The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector.  
IMPORTANT: Only the RJ-45 serial interface cable can be connected to this port. Do not  
connect any other interface cables such as the Ethernet cable. Doing so could damage the  
device, your server, or both.  
2
3
USB3 connector  
The USB3 connector allows the server to be connected to a device accepting the USB  
interface.  
SLEEP switch  
Pressing the sleep switch once causes the server to enter into the sleep state (power saving  
mode). Pressing the power switch in the sleep state recovers the machine to the normal  
state. (This function is supported by Windows 2000.)  
UID (Unit ID) switch  
4
Pressing the UID switch turns UID lamp (blue) located on the front panel and the rear panel on  
and off. The UID lamp located on the rear panel is visible through the rear of the chassis and  
allows you to locate the server you're working on from the rear of the servers on a rack.  
UID lamp (blue)  
Lights in blue when the ID switch is pressed.  
RESET switch  
5
6
7
The reset switch is used to reset the server.  
POWER/SLEEP lamp (green)  
Lights in green when the server is powered on. Goes off when the server is powered off.  
Blinks when the system is placed in the sleep mode.  
8
POWER switch  
The power switch is used to turn on/off the power. If you press the switch once, then the  
POWER/SLEEP lamp goes on and the power is turned on. If you press the switch again, the  
power is turned off. The system is forcibly shut down when the power switch is pressed  
continuously for four seconds or longer.  
9
Dump switch  
The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server.  
10 STATUS lamp (green/amber)  
Lights in green while the server is in successful operation. When any error is detected, this  
lamp lights or blinks in amber.  
11 LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS lamp (green)  
Lights in green while the server is connected to the network. Blinking in green indicates the  
network activity. Numbers printed near the lamps indicate the LAN port number.  
12 DISK ACCESS lamp (green/amber)  
Lights in green while the internal hard disk is in access. When any one of the internal hard  
disks fails, this lamp lights in amber.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-7  
Rear View  
See Chapter 8 for detail information on lamp indication.  
1
2
3-1  
3-2  
4
5
6
7
8
20  
13-1  
13-2  
10 11 12  
14 15  
16  
9
17 18  
17  
19  
21  
1
2
3
4
AC inlet 1  
The AC inlet 1 is connected with the power cord coming with the server.  
AC inlet 2  
The AC inlet 2 is used when the additional power supply unit is installed in the server.  
ICMB-1 (left) ICMB-2 (right) connector  
The ICMB connector is connected to a device having the ICMB interface.  
Serial port B connector  
The serial port B connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface.  
The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector.  
For using this port, the rear serial cable that comes with your server should be connected to  
this connector.  
5
External SCSI connector  
The external SCSI connector is used to connect the server to external SCSI devices. For the  
connection, attached SCSI cable is necessary and some cable connections must be changed  
on the baseboard.  
6
6
PCI slot power lamp (green) (upper)  
The PCI slot power lamp is lit when the power of the PCI slot being on.  
PCI slot fault lamp (amber) (lower)  
PCI slot fault lamp blinks when the hot plug PCI function is enabled with Windows 2000. The  
lamp also goes on if a fault occurs in the PCI board installed into the slot or the slot itself.  
7
Printer port connector  
The printer port connector is connected with a printer with the Centronics interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8 General Description  
8
9
UID lamp (blue)  
This lamp is lit when the UID switch is pressed.  
Keyboard connector  
The keyboard connector is connected with PS/2 type keyboard.  
10 Mouse connector  
The mouse connector is connected with the PS/2 type mouse.  
11 Serial port A connector  
The serial port A connector is connected with a device having the serial interface.  
The server can't directly be connected to a leased line through the connector.  
12 Monitor connector  
The monitor connector is connected with the display unit.  
13 USB-1 - USB-2 connectors  
The USB-1 (upper) and USB-2 (lower) connectors are connected with devices accepting the  
USB interface.  
14 Additional PCI board slots  
Optional PCI boards (32-bit/33MHz) may be inserted into the slots.  
15 Additional PCI board slots  
Optional PCI boards (64-bit/100 MHz) may be inserted into the slots.  
16 Additional PCI hot-plug board slots  
Optional PCI hot-plug boards (64-bit/100 MHz) may be inserted into the slots.  
17 LINK/ACT lamp  
The LINK/ACT lamp shows the LAN access status.  
18 LAN1 connector  
The LAN1 connector is connected with a network system on LAN. This port can be operated  
through 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T interface.  
19 LAN2 connector  
The LAN2 connector is connected with a network system on LAN. This port can be operated  
through 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T interface.  
20 100/10 lamp  
The 100/10 lamp indicates the LAN transfer rate.  
21 1000/100/10 lamp  
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates the LAN transfer rate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-9  
Internal View  
3
4
5
6
2
1
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fan bay (6 Cooling fans are located in this bay.)  
Electronics bay  
Additional PCI board slots (8 slots)  
Hot Plug PCI LED Board  
Memory board  
Processor board air duct  
Cover open sensor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10 General Description  
Electronics Bay  
2
1
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Hot-plug PCI board slots  
Non-hot-plug PCI board slots  
Dummy sponge  
Processor board  
Baseboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-11  
Baseboard  
1-4 1-3 1-2 1-1 2 3  
4
5
6
7
8
19  
18  
9
5
10  
17  
16  
15 14 13  
12  
11  
1
Additional PCI board slots (8slots)  
1-1: PCI#1 and 2 (1st PCI Bus, 32-bit, 33MHz, 5V PCI (arranged from right to left))  
1-2: PCI#3 and 4 (3rd PCI Bus, 64-bit, 100MHz, 3.3V PCI–X (arranged from right to left))  
1-3: PCI#5 and 6 (4th PCI Bus, 64-bit, 100MHz, 3.3V PCI–X Hot plug)  
(arranged from right to left)  
1-4: PCI#7 and 8 (5th PCI Bus, 64-bit, 100MHz, 3.3V PCI–X Hot plug)  
(arranged from right to left)  
2
3
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) connector  
Hot Plug PCI LED Board connector  
4
5
6
7
Rear panel I/O connectors (see page 2-7)  
Processor board interface connectors  
Jumper switch for clearing CMOS/password  
Hot-swap back plane (HSBP Primary) connector  
COM B connector  
8
9
USB #3 connector  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Lithium battery  
Power connector  
Power connector  
Floppy disk drive connector  
Front panel board interface connector  
IDE connector (for CD-ROM drive)  
Ultra320(B) connector (for 5.25-inch or external SCSI device)  
Ultra320(A) connector (for 3.5-inch hard disk bay)  
Cooling fan connector  
Hot-swap back plane (HSBP Secondary) connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12 General Description  
Processor Board  
3
4
2
5
1
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPU1 socket (the default processor is installed in this socket)  
CPU2 socket (the optional processor should be installed in this socket)  
CPU3 socket (the optional processor should be installed in this socket)  
CPU4 socket (the optional processor should be installed in this socket)  
Baseboard interface connectors  
Memory board interface connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-13  
Memory Board  
1
2
1
2
DIMM socket  
The default DIMMs are installed in the sockets 1 to 4.  
The optional DIMMs should be installed in the sockets 5 to 12.  
To enable the online sparing / memory mirroring feature, see Chapter 9 "DIMM".  
Processor board interface connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14 General Description  
STANDARD FEATURES  
High performance  
Expandability  
„ IntelXeonTM Processor MP  
N8100-1023F: 2.20GHz/2MB  
N8100-1024F: 3GHz/4MB  
„ High-speed memory access  
(Supports PC-200-compliant registered  
ECC DDR DRAM)  
„ High-speed 1000BASE-T/100BASE-  
TX/10BASE-T interface  
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)  
„ High-speed disk access  
(Ultra320 SCSI x 2)  
„ Wide variety of optional I/O slots  
Two 32-bit/33 MHz PCI slots  
Six 64-bit/100 MHz PCI-X sots  
(four slots support hot-plug)  
„ Large memory of up to 24 GB  
„ 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay holds five  
hot-swap SCSI hard disk drives  
„ Remote power-on feature  
„ Up to four multi-processors are available  
for upgrade.  
„ Many SCSI device connection patterns  
„ USB interface  
Many Available Features  
„ Graphic accelerator "RAGE XL" support  
„ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no  
emulation mode) format support  
„ POWER switch mask  
„ Software power-off  
„ Remote power-on feature  
„ AC-LINK feature  
„ Intelligent Platform Management  
Interface (IPMI) feature  
„ Baseboard Management Controller  
(BMC)  
„ Remote console feature  
High-reliability  
Self-diagnosis  
„ Memory mirroring feature  
„ Online sparing memory feature  
„ Memory monitoring feature (single-bit  
error correction/ double-bit error  
detection)  
„ CPU/memory degradation feature  
(logical isolation of a failed device)  
„ Bus parity error detection  
„ Thermal sensor  
„ Power On Self-Test (POST)  
„ Test and Diagnosis (T&D)  
Maintenance Features  
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility  
„ Memory dump feature using the DUMP  
switch  
Power Saving Feature  
„ Sleep feature (available for Windows  
„ Error notification  
Server 2003/Windows 2000)  
„ Internal cooling fan monitoring feature  
„ Internal voltage monitoring feature  
„ BIOS password feature  
„ Security feature (security lock)  
„ Redundant power supply  
„ Disk array (optional)  
Easy and Fine Setup  
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup  
utility)  
„ Express Setup  
„ Configuration Diskette Creator  
„ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)  
„ SCSISelect (SCSI device utility)  
Management Utilities  
„ NEC ESMPRO  
„ NEC Management Workstation  
Application (NEC MWA)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-15  
Power Supplies  
The system contains two auto-sensing 430 watt power supplies at an operating frequency of 50/60  
Hz.  
A third optional power supply may be added as part of a fault-tolerant hot-swap design. With three  
power supplies installed, in the unlikely event of a power supply failure, the load is transferred to  
the remaining power supply without interruption to normal operation. In this case the faulty power  
supply can be replaced without powering down the system.  
NOTE: The power supplies are not hot-swappable unless there are  
three supplies installed.  
The power supplies are designed to comply with existing emission standards and provide sufficient  
power for a fully loaded system configuration.  
Peripheral Bays  
The system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. The chassis  
includes these peripheral bays:  
„ Media bay for installing the standard 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (supports 720KB and  
1.44MB floppy disk media) and the standard CD-ROM drive.  
„ A 5.25-inch device bay for installing half-height 5.25-inch peripheral devices such as an  
optional tape drives.  
„ The SCSI hard disk drive bay for installing up to five SCSI hard disk drives.  
„ The SCSI disk drives can be easily installed or removed. The drive carrier allows you to  
access to disk drives from the front of the system. If disk drives are provided with RAID  
configuration within the system, a disk drive can be swapped with another without power  
interruption in the system (hot-swap).  
NOTE: The SCSI hard disk drive bays contain a hot-swap back plane  
that require an 80-pin single connector attachment (SCA) connector on  
the drives that you install.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16 General Description  
Memory Mirroring Feature  
Memory mirroring is a new high-availability feature on your server.  
Memory mirroring allows the server to continue operation if a DIMM error is encountered.  
With memory mirroring, one degraded memory group is automatically disengaged and the operation  
is switched to the other memory group. This brings the reliability of the system to memory  
uncorrectable error without any service interruption and without compromising system availability.  
To enabling memory mirroring feature, it is necessary to install the DIMMs in group #1 for a  
normal operation and to install the DIMMs in group #3 for standby.  
In this case, it doesn't allow the system to install DIMMs in group #2.  
Online Sparing Memory Feature  
Online spare memory is a new high-availability feature on your server.  
Online spare memory allows the server to continue operation if a DIMM begin to fail. When a pre-  
defined threshold for the maximum number of correctable ECC errors has been exceeded, online  
spare memory initializes the bank in standby (spare bank) and takes over the failing memory bank.  
The memory bank that exceeds the error threshold can be replaced at the customer's convenience  
during a scheduled shut down.  
With online spare memory, degraded memory is automatically disengaged and a fresh set of  
memory is used in its place. This brings the reliability of the system to the pre-failure level without  
any service interruption and without compromising system availability.  
To enable online sparing memory feature, it is necessary to install the DIMMs in group #1 or in  
group #1 and group #2 for a normal operation and to install the DIMMs in group #3 for standby.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-17  
SAF-TE Logic  
The SCSI backplane includes SAF-TE (SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure) logic that provides  
an interface to the disk subsystem that supports status signals, hot swapping drives, and enclosure  
monitoring.  
The transport mechanism for the standardized alert detection and status reporting is the SCSI bus.  
Disk drives, power supplies, cooling fans, and temperature are continually monitored and the  
conditions then reported over the SCSI bus to the system. When used with RAID management  
software the user can be alerted of impending or imminent disk conditions requiring attention.  
This allows the user to react to conditions that could normally go unnoticed until data loss.  
System Cooling  
The chassis includes a hot-swappable fan module with six fans for cooling the processor(s), hard  
drives, and PCI cards. The fan system is located in the middle of the chassis to pull cooling air  
through the chassis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-18 General Description  
System Board Features  
The following subsections describe the system board major components.  
Processor  
The processor board accommodates one to four Intel Xeon processor MP with 512k/1MB cache in  
the FC-PGA2 package.  
DIMM Memory  
The memory board contains twelve 168-pin DIMM slots each supporting 72-bit ECC (64-bit main  
memory plus ECC) registered PC-200 Double Data Rate (DDR) DIMMs. Memory is partitioned in  
three banks. You may install a minimum of 512 MB (128 MB × 4) or as much as 12 GB.  
The controller automatically detects, sizes, and initializes the memory array, depending on the type,  
size, and speed of the installed DIMMs, and reports memory size and allocation to the server via  
configuration registers.  
NOTE: Use DIMMs that have been provided by NEC. Contact your  
service representative or dealer for a current list of approved memory  
modules.  
Onboard Video  
The baseboard incorporates an ATI RAGE XL PCI graphics accelerator with 4 MB of video  
SDRAM that supports all standard IBM VGA modes. The embedded SVGA video subsystem  
supports:  
„ Pixel resolutions up to 1024 × 768  
„ CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz vertical refresh rate  
The baseboard supports disabling of the onboard video through BIOS Setup or when a plug-in video  
card is installed in any of the PCI slots.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-19  
SCSI Controller  
The baseboard includes an embedded Adaptec AIC-7902, which contains two independent channels.  
You can enable or disable the SCSI controller in BIOS Setup. Both channels support 16-bit SE or  
LVD SCSI operations at the following speeds:  
„ Ultra320 (320 MB/sec)  
„ Ultra160 (160 MB/sec)  
„ Ultra 2 (80 MB/sec)  
„ Ultra Wide SE (40 MB/sec)  
The baseboard provides active terminators, termination voltage, resettable fuses, and protection  
diodes for both SCSI channels. You can disable the onboard terminators in BIOS Setup.  
Network Interface Controllers  
NOTE: To ensure EMC product regulation compliance, the system  
must be used with shielded LAN cables.  
The baseboard includes two network interface controllers (NICs):  
„ Intel 82550 NIC that supports 10Base-T and 100Base-TX networks  
„ Intel 82544 NIC that supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX networks, and 1000BASE-T  
networks  
The 82550 controller supports the following features:  
„ 32-bit PCI  
„ Integrated IEEE 802.3 10Base-T and 100Base-TX compatible PHY  
„ IEEE 820.3u auto-negotiation support  
„ Chained memory structure similar to the 82559, 82558, 82557 and 82596  
„ Full duplex support at both 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps operation  
„ Low power +3.3 V device  
„ IP checksum off-loading  
NIC 1 can be used as both a network interface and server management interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-20 General Description  
The 82544 controller supports the following features:  
„ Direct 32/64-bit, 33/66-MHz interface to the PCI bus  
„ Integrated IEEE 802.3 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 10BASE-T  
„ Integrated third-generation MAC and proven IEEE 803.3ab compatible PHY  
„ Full duplex support for 10-Mbps, 100-Mbps, and 1000 Mpbs operation  
„ Descriptor ring management architecture optimized to deliver both high performance and  
PCI/PCI-X bus efficiency  
„ Low power +3.3 V device  
„ IP and TCP/UDP checksum off-loading  
System Board Management Controller (BMC)  
Server management is concentrated in the System Board Management Controller (BMC). The  
BMC and associated circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage, which remains active  
when system power is switched off, but the ac power source is still on and connected.  
The BMC supports the NEC Management Workstation Application (NEC MWA), which allows  
remote server management via a modem or direct connection to a manager system. Events  
monitored by the manager system include over-temperature and over-voltage conditions, fan failure,  
or chassis intrusion.  
Information on NEC MWA may be found on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM included  
with your server.  
One major function of the BMC is to autonomously monitor system management events, and log  
their occurrence in the nonvolatile System Event Log (SEL). The events being monitored include  
overtemperature and overvoltage conditions, fan failure, or chassis intrusion. To enable accurate  
monitoring, the BMC maintains the nonvolatile Sensor Data Record (SDR), from which sensor  
information can be retrieved. The BMC provides an ISA host interface to SDR sensor information,  
so that software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server's current status.  
The BMC performs the following:  
„ Monitors server board temperature and voltage  
„ Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot (FRB)  
„ Detects and indicates fan failure  
„ Manages the SEL interface  
„ Manages the SDR Repository interface  
„ Monitors the SDR/SEL timestamp clock  
„ Monitors the system management watchdog timer  
„ Monitors the periodic SMI timer  
„ Monitors the event receiver  
„ Controls secure mode, including video blanking, diskette write-protect monitoring, and  
front panel lock/unlock initiation  
„ Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-21  
Degradation Feature  
The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM, processor, or cooling fans to assure  
continuous operation of the server when the POST (Power On Self-Test, self-diagnosis program  
after power on) detects such a DIMM, processor, or cooling fans.  
Failed DIMMs, processors, and cooling fan may be identified on the screen that the POST displays,  
or with the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." They may also be identified on the system that has the  
NEC ESMPRO installed.  
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)  
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet  
from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.  
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for "Wake On LAN" in the Advanced Chipset  
Control of the Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)  
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER switch  
once to start the OS, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.  
„ Abnormal previous system shut-down  
„ No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power  
blackout, etc.)  
NOTE: Wake On LAN feature is supported in 100BASE-TX adapter  
on the baseboard. It is also supported in PCI slot #1 and #2 if the  
adapter which applies to Wake On LAN is installed.  
AC-LINK Feature  
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the  
server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS  
to the server. AC-LINK feature can be enabled or disabled with "AC-LINK" in the Server menu  
of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-22 General Description  
Security  
To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system, the system includes a full lockable front  
panel and Server Management software that monitors the system intrusion switches.  
Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring  
The front bezel of the server contains a mechanical lock to prevent access to the front of the  
computer chassis.  
The computer chassis includes an intrusion switch for the front access cover. When this cover is  
opened, the switch transmits an alarm signal to the system board, where server management  
software processes the signal.  
Software Locks via the System Setup Utility  
The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or  
accidental access to the system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is  
allowed only after the user enters the correct password(s). For example:  
„ Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the  
keyboard and mouse after a specified time-out period – 2 to 120 minutes.  
„ Set and enable an administrative password.  
„ Set and enable a user password  
„ Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel  
reset, power and sleep switches.  
„ Activate a hot-key combination to enter secure mode quickly.  
„ Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-23  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The CD-ROM that comes with your server contains a setup utility called "NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER." When you have first installed the server or append features to the server,  
use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to set up your server.  
Refer to Chapter 6 for details.  
The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are:  
„ To install the OS.  
It installs an operating system.  
„ To diagnose the system.  
It diagnoses the server.  
„ To create a support disk.  
It copies utilities in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into a floppy disk to launch  
them from the floppy disk.  
„ To update the BIOS  
It updates the BIOS features of the server.  
„ To update the Windows System*  
It updates the several resources of Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows  
2000.  
„ To install the utilities*  
It install the management utilities of NEC ESMPRO and NEC MWA.  
„ To read the online documents*  
It opens the online document files (".pdf" files).  
* These functions are available under Windows system.  
NOTE: Some features among those listed above can be used from the  
remote computer via cross cable, modem, or LAN (remote console).  
See Chapter 6 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-24 General Description  
NEC ESMPRO  
The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the OS. The NEC ESMPRO  
includes the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and the NEC ESMPRO  
Agent for the NEC Express server.  
NOTE: For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO, system  
configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO, see Chapter 6.  
Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the OS you install.  
Ask your service representative for details.  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for proactive maintenance and fault analysis of the server.  
Normally this utility is used by the maintenance engineer.  
Refer to Chapter 8 for details.  
System Diagnostic Utility  
The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to prevent the  
hardware failures. See Chapter 7 for details.  
NEC Management Workstation Application (NEC MWA)  
The NEC Management Workstation Application (NEC MWA) is an application program for remote  
management of the server from a system management computer (a computer with the NEC  
ESMPRO Manager running) through a network. The MWA provides management on the process  
from power-on, POST execution, to OS boot-up of the server.  
See Chapter 6 or online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-25  
USING YOUR SERVER  
This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as the  
floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive. See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk, CD-  
ROM, and accessories including the keyboard and the mouse.  
Front Bezel  
Remove the front bezel to power on/off the server, to access the floppy disk drive and CD-ROM  
drive, and to install/remove hard disks to the 3.5-inch hard disk bay.  
IMPORTANT: To open the front bezel, you must unlock the door  
with the provided security key.  
Installing or Removing the Front Bezel  
When turning the power of the server on/off, accessing to the floppy disk drive or CD-ROM drive,  
or installing or removing a hard disk on or from the 3.5-inch hard disk bay, first remove the front  
bezel.  
IMPORTANT: The front bezel can be opened only when you unlock  
it by using the attached security key.  
1. Insert the attached security key into the key slot and turn the key to the front bezel side  
with it pressed lightly to release the lock.  
2. Hold the right end of the front bezel lightly to pull it toward you.  
3. Slide the front bezel to the left a little to remove the tab from the frame and then remove  
the front bezel from the server.  
Frame  
Tab  
2
1
Unlock Lock  
To install the front bezel, latch the tab at the left side of the front bezel on the server frame.  
After the installation, lock the front bezel by using the key for security.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-26 General Description  
POWER Switch  
Use the POWER switch to turn on/off the server.  
Power On  
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp lights in green.  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
POWER switch  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a  
UPS (Uninterruptive Power Supply), make sure that the power  
control device is powered.  
„
If the power cord is connected to the server, an initial diagnosis of  
the hardware starts. The POWER switch does not work while in  
diagnosis. Wait for about 10 seconds, then press the POWER  
switch.  
„
Do not turn off the server until characters following the "NEC" logo  
appears on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-27  
POST  
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnosis feature saved in the baseboard of the server.  
When the power of the server is turned on, POST automatically runs to check the baseboard,  
memory board, CPU, keyboard, and mouse. During POST messages indicating the starts of several  
BIOS setup utilities may also appear.  
At the shipment of the server, it is set to have the NEC logo appear on the display unit during POST.  
Pressing Esc allows the information on the execution of POST to be displayed.  
NOTE: The information on the result of diagnosis by POST can be  
displayed from the start without the depression of Esc on the BIOS  
menu. If you desire it, change the setting of "Boot-time Diagnosis  
Screen" on "Advanced" of the BIOS configuration to "Enabled."  
It may not always necessary to check the result of POST. Check the messages which may appear  
during POST in the following cases:  
„ Installation of the server  
„ Suspicion of failure  
„ Beep for many times in the period from power-on to OS start  
„ Appearance of an error message on the display unit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-28 General Description  
POST Flow  
The flow of operations executed by POST is sequentially described below:  
IMPORTANT: Depending on the system configuration, message  
"Press Any Key" requesting key entry may appear on the display screen.  
This is requested by BIOS on an installed optional board. See the  
explanation described in the manual for the option and press any key.  
1. After power-on, POST is activated to start the memory check. The message indicating the  
counted size of the base memory and that of the additional memory appears at the upper  
left corner of the display screen. In addition, the following message appears at the bottom  
of the screen.  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu, <Space> to abort memory test  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network  
NOTE: Pressing Space under the display of message "<Space> to  
abort memory test" allows the memory test to be skipped.  
It may take several minutes to complete the memory check depending on the size of the  
memory installed in the server. Similarly, it may take about a minute to display the proper  
information on the screen at rebooting.  
2. Detects the SCSI controller built in the server and displays the message prompting the  
start of the SCSI BIOS setup utility (without any key entry for several seconds, POST is  
automatically continued). Press the proper keys according to the screen display.  
Press <Ctrl> <A> for SCSISelect(TM) utility!  
Now press Ctrl + A to start the utility. See Chapter 4 for the setting procedures and  
features of the parameters.  
For example, the SCSI BIOS setup utility must be used in the following cases:  
„ Installation of an SCSI device in the 5.25-inch device bay  
„ Connection of an external SCSI device (The removal of the SCSI cable for 5.25-inch  
device in the server and the connection of the SCSI cable coming with the server (for  
external connection) are required.)  
„ Modification of SCSI device connections within the server  
If the SCSI BIOS setup utility is terminated, the server runs POST from its start again.  
When more than one SCSI controller boards are installed on the PCI bus of the server, the  
messages indicating the starts of the SCSI BIOS setup utilities for the installed boards  
appear in the following order:  
PCI slot number PCI #1, PCI #2, PCI #3, PCI #4, PCI #5, PCI #6, PCI #7, and PCI #8.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-29  
3. Displays the SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices on the screen.  
4. If one or more disk array controllers are installed, displays the message prompting you to  
start the Disk Array BIOS setup utility.  
Start the utility according to the message if you need to change the settings. Refer to the  
manuals of the disk array controllers for details.  
Without any entry, any of the following messages appears.  
5. Displays the message notifying you of the detection of the CPU and the connected  
keyboard and mouse.  
6. Displays any of the following messages.  
Pattern 1:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network  
Pattern 2:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network  
Or  
Pattern 3:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network  
Pattern 4:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network  
* The displayed message may vary depending on the device status.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-30 General Description  
NOTE: The operation or utility to be started at each key entry is  
described below. These operations or utilities may not always be  
started.  
„ Esc  
Press Esc to display the boot menu at the end of POST. This menu  
allows you to select the device to be started.  
Boot Menu  
1. CD-ROM Drive  
2. +Removable Devices  
3. +Hard Drive  
4. IBA 4.0.19 Slot 0003  
5. IBA 1.0.17 Slot 0103  
<Enter Setup>  
„ F2  
Press F2 to start the BIOS setup utility. Start the utility to change  
the setting of the server to that fit to the environment in which the  
server is used. In general, the setting may not be particularly  
changed by starting the utility excluding the case in which the  
previous message accompanying by an error message appears. See  
Chapter 4 for the setting procedures and features of the parameters.  
„ F4  
Press F4 to start the Off-line Maintenance Utility from the  
maintenance partition. See Chapter 6 for the maintenance partition.  
„ F12  
Press F12 to run the network boot.  
„ F1  
If message "Press <F1> to resume" appears, an error is detected  
during POST. See "Error messages during POST" for the  
information on the messages and the proper actions against the  
errors. If an error message appears, pressing F1 allows the BIOS  
setup utility to be started.  
7. When a password is set in the BIOS setup utility SETUP, the screen prompting you to  
enter the password appears after the normal termination of POST.  
The password can be entered for up to three times. If you enter the password incorrectly  
all the time, the server cannot be started. In this case, turn off the power of the server, wait  
for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the power to start the server again.  
IMPORTANT: Set the password only after OS is installed.  
8. Starts OS at the termination of POST.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-31  
POST Error Messages  
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. See Chapter  
8 for POST error codes.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before  
consulting with your service representative. Alarm messages are  
useful information for maintenance.  
Power Off  
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to  
a UPS, refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls  
the UPS.  
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the  
server.  
1. Shut down the OS.  
2. Press the POWER switch on the front of the server.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.  
3. Power off peripheral devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-32 General Description  
SLEEP Switch  
The SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server (power-saving mode or sleep  
mode).  
NOTE: To use the SLEEP switch, an OS supporting the sleep feature  
is required. (Available for Windows 2000.)  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
SLEEP switch  
Press the SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power-saving mode.  
(The POWER/SLEEP lamp blinks.) In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory data  
and the status of the previous operations.  
To resume the original state, press the POWER switch. (It may take a little time to resume the  
original state.)  
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on  
the OS in use. (Available for Windows 2000.)  
IMPORTANT: Do not change system configuration while turning into  
the power-saving mode or in the power-saving mode. Otherwise, you  
may fail to resume the original state.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-33  
Floppy Disk Drive  
Your server is provided with the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on its front to write/read data to/from a  
floppy disk.  
Your server supports the following 3.5-inch floppy disks:  
„ 2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)  
Stores data of 1.44MB.  
„ 2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)  
Store data of 720KB.  
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before inserting a floppy disk  
into the floppy disk drive.  
When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, the drive clicks and the eject  
button on the floppy disk is slightly pushed out.  
NOTES:  
„
„
You cannot use a 1.2MB-formatted floppy disk.  
When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted, the message notifying  
that date read is not available and the message prompting formatting  
are displayed. Refer to the manual that comes with the OS to  
format the floppy disk.  
„
If the floppy disk contains a system, powering on or restarting the  
server with the floppy disk inserted boots the system from the  
floppy disk.  
To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, press the eject button.  
NOTE: Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlit before  
ejecting the floppy disk. Ejecting the disk when the access lamp is lit  
may destroy the disk data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-34 General Description  
NOTE: Use of the floppy disk  
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate  
structure and requires care. Keep the following notes in mind to use  
it:  
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it  
goes.  
„
„
Attach the label to the correct position.  
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or  
ball-point pen.  
„
„
„
„
Do not open the shutter.  
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.  
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.  
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place  
exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater).  
„
„
Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke.  
Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid (e.g., water) and  
chemicals.  
„
Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects (e.g.,  
magnet).  
„
„
Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it.  
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from  
magnetism and dust.  
„
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data  
from accidental erasure. You can read data from a write-protected  
floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format  
it. NEC recommends that you should write-protect any floppy disk  
containing valuable data unless you are about to save data. To  
write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch  
provided on its back.  
Write-protect switch  
Write  
Write  
disable enable  
„
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal  
changes, as well as operator's misconduct or sever failures, may  
cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, NEC recommends that  
you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a regular  
basis. (Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk  
provided with the server.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-35  
CD-ROM Drive  
Your server is provided with the CD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD-ROM (read-  
only compact disk). The CD-ROM provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not leave the tray ejected from the CD-ROM drive.  
Set a CD-ROM on the CD-ROM drive in the following procedure.  
1. Confirm that the power of the server is on (with the POWER/SLEEP lamp being lit in  
green) before setting the CD-ROM on the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Press the Eject button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.  
The tray comes out a little.  
3. Hold the tray lightly and pull it out toward you until the tray stops.  
4. Put the CD-ROM on the tray carefully and securely with the date recorded surface facing  
toward the tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-36 General Description  
5. As shown in the figure below, hold the tray with a hand and press the CD-ROM with  
fingers of another hand to make the hole of the CD-ROM fit to the rotor at the center of  
the tray.  
Rotor  
Press this part of  
CD-ROM.  
6. Push the front of the tray lightly to retract it into the drive.  
IMPORTANT: If a noisy sound in driving the CD-ROM drive occurs  
after setting a CD-ROM, set it again correctly.  
To take out the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, press the Eject button in the similar way in  
setting the CD-ROM to make the tray go out.  
If the access lamp is lit in orange, the CD is being accessed. Confirm that the access lamp is not lit  
before pressing the Eject button.  
As shown in the figure below, hold the tray with a hand and take the end of the CD-ROM lightly by  
the fingers of another hand with the suppression of the rotor at the center of the tray to remove the  
CD-ROM from the tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-37  
After taking out the CD-ROM, return the tray into the drive.  
When you fail to eject the CD-ROM tray with the Eject button and take out the CD-ROM from the  
server, follow the procedure below.  
1. Press the POWER switch to power off the server. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)  
2. Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length (a  
straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the emergency hole on the upper  
front of the CD-ROM drive and gently push it in until the tray is ejected.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.  
If the above procedure does not let you take out the CD-ROM,  
contact your service representative.  
Emergency hole  
3. Hold the tray and pull it out.  
4. Take out the CD-ROM.  
5. Push the tray back into position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-38 General Description  
NOTE: Use of the CD-ROM  
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:  
„
For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the  
playback of such a disk with the CD drive is not guaranteed.  
„
„
„
„
Do not drop the CD-ROM.  
Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.  
Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.  
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with  
your hand.  
„
„
Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on  
the tray.  
Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a  
pencil or ball-point pen.  
„
„
Keep the CD-ROM away from cigarette smoke.  
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place  
exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater).  
„
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the  
CD-ROM from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and  
gently.  
Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record  
spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner.  
„
„
Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.  
If the CD-ROM emits large noise in the CD-ROM drive, remove the  
CD-ROM and insert it back again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Setting Up Your Server  
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step  
basis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Setting Up Your Server  
SETUP FLOW  
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.  
Selecting a site  
Select a suitable site for the server.  
Unpacking the system  
Unpack the server and accessories from the chipping carton box.  
Assembling the rack-mount system  
Assemble the 19-inch rack cabinet and install the server.  
Connecting peripheral devices  
Connect peripheral devices to the server.  
Connecting the power cord  
Connect the power cord to the server.  
Turning on the server  
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal  
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.  
Installing the operating system  
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5.  
Installing the utilities  
Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
See Chapter 6.  
Making backup copies of system information  
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system  
information.  
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after  
replacing the system board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-3  
SELECTING A SITE  
Installation  
Your server unit should be mounted in a standard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet.  
Installation of Rack  
Refer to the documentation attached to the rack or contact your service representative for rack  
installation of the server unit.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-  
3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not use the server in any unapproved place.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not carry or install the server only by a single person.  
■ Do not install the server where the load may be concentrated on a specific  
point.  
■ Do not install any component on the server only by a single person.  
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.  
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.  
■ Do not provide the wiring exceeding the rating power.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4 Setting Up Your Server  
Before you begin the rack installation review the following guidelines.  
Do Not:  
„ Locate a rack in a narrow space that would inhibit devices from being pulled out from the  
rack completely.  
„ Locate the rack on a floor that cannot bear the total weight of the rack and devices  
mounted in the rack.  
„ Locate the rack in a place where stabilizers cannot be installed or where the rack can be  
installed only after proper earthquake-resistant is constructed.  
„ Locate the rack on an uneven or slanting floor  
„ Locate the rack in an area that has drastic temperature change (near a heater, air  
conditioner, or refrigerator).  
„ Locate the rack where intense vibration may be generated.  
„ Locate the rack where corrosive gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide,  
chlorine, ammonia, ozone, etc) exist.  
And also, locate it in the environment where the air (or dust) includes components  
accelerating corrosion (ex. sulfur, sodium chloride) or conductive metals.  
„ Place the rack on a carpet not subject to the anti-static process.  
„ Locate the rack where some objects may fall on the rack.  
„ Locate the rack near a device that is generating intense magnetic fields (such as a TV,  
radio, broadcast/communication antenna, power transmission wire, and electromagnetic  
crane.) If unavoidable, contact your service representative to request proper shielding.)  
„ Locate the rack where the power cord of the server must be connected to an AC outlet that  
shares other devices with large power consumption.  
„ Locate the rack next to equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at  
power-on/power-off of commercial power supply through a relay). If you must install  
the server close to such equipment, request your service representative for separate power  
cabling or noise filter installation.  
„ Locate the rack where following conditions can not be satisfied.  
Conditions for operation: *  
Temperature: 10 to 35°C  
Humidity: 20 to 80% (no condensation)  
* It is recommended that the server should be used in a room where temperature is in the  
range between 15 to 25°C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-5  
UNPACKING THE SYSTEM  
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If the shipping  
boxes are damaged, note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for reference. After removing  
the contents of the containers, keep the cartons and the packing materials. If the contents appear  
damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a damage claim with the carrier immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6 Setting Up Your Server  
ASSEMBLING THE RACK-MOUNT SYSTEM  
This subsection provides the instructions for the rack-mount server unit into a standard EIA 19-inch  
rack cabinet.  
This subsection also describes the removal procedures for the rack mount server unit from the 19-  
inch rack cabinet.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-  
3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not use any rack which does not conform to the relevant standard.  
■ Disconnect the power cord(s) before installing or removing the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.  
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.  
■ Always install the server in the specified place.  
■ Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed.  
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-7  
ESD Precaution  
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other components. You  
can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground  
when handling system components.  
Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keep them in  
their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system.  
Checking Components  
Confirm that the following tools or components are provided to install the server on the rack.  
1
2
3
4
11  
6
7
5
9
8
10  
12  
15  
14  
16  
17  
13  
18 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8 Setting Up Your Server  
No.  
1
Item  
Front bezel  
Q'ty  
1
Remarks  
2
3
4
Slide rail assembly (L)  
Slide rail assembly (R)  
Cable arm  
1
1
1
"L" is stamped on the rail.  
"R" is stamped on the rail.  
5
6
Adapter bracket  
Handle (L)  
1
1
7
Handle (R)  
1
8
9
Arm bracket (700)  
Arm bracket (900)  
1
1
Use one according to the distance between the  
front and rear vertical mounting rails of your rack  
cabinet.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Arm stopper  
Template  
Tie-wrap  
Lock spring  
Screw-A  
Screw-B  
Screw-C  
Screw-D  
Washer-A  
Washer-B  
1
1
6
1
6
7
14  
6
12  
4
25 cm long.  
Used to fix the power cords.  
CPIMSx#8-32x6  
CPIMSx6-32x8  
CBIMS×5×10×3GF  
PL-CPIMSx4x8x15BF  
M5-14 (Assembled with Screw-C.)  
PIWAx5x15BF (Assembled with Screw-D.)  
Required Tools  
#2 Phillips screwdriver and flat tip screwdriver are recommended for assembling the rack-mount  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-9  
Installation Procedure  
Install the server on the rack in the following procedure.  
1. Define the position (height) at which the server is installed by using templates.  
The templates have the same vertical size as the server. Put the templates on the front and  
rear of the rack to locate them. The installation positions of the core nuts and slide rail  
assembly are specified on the templates.  
Icons showing the positions at which  
core nuts are installed  
Template (front)  
Template (rear)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10 Setting Up Your Server  
2. Install the core nuts coming with the rack at the positions defined by the templates.  
Install four core nuts (two for each of left and right sides) on the front face of the rack  
from the inner side. The server is fixed to the rack with the core nuts, four screws C, and  
four washers A.  
Install two core nuts from the inner side of the rear of the rack (at the left side when you  
faces the rear of the rack). When the core nuts are installed on a rack with the distance  
between the front and rear mount faces of 700 or 743 mm, fix the arm bracket (700) to the  
core nuts.  
Hang the lower clip of a core nut on the proper rectangular hole and insert the upper clip  
into the hole using a flat-tip driver or a similar tool.  
IMPORTANT: Install the core nuts so that the clips are located at the  
top and bottom. If any core nut is installed with the clips located at the  
left and right ends, the server may be dropped to cause it to be defected  
and also people to be injured severely.  
3. Pull out either one of the inner rails from the slide rail assembly.  
If the inner rails are pull out, these are locked once at a position of the way. Push the  
release lever to release the lock and pull out the inner rails further.  
Inner rail  
Slide rail assembly  
Release lever  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-11  
4. Install an inner rail on one side of the server with three screws A in the direction shown in  
the figure.  
Release lever  
NOTE: Each inner rail may be used at either of the left and right sides.  
However, use the proper inner rail to each slide rail assembly from  
which the rail has been removed so that the direction of the inner rail  
can be fit to the slide rail assembly.  
5. Install the other inner rail on the other side of the server by steps 3 and 4 above.  
6. Install handles R and L on the front of the server with four screws B.  
NOTE: The left handle is different from the right handle in shape.  
Check the shape of each handle. The handle (L) has the frame on which  
the tab of the front bezel is hung.  
Handle (L)  
Handle (R)  
Frame on which tab  
is hung  
Left side of server  
Right side of server  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12 Setting Up Your Server  
7. After removing the screw located on the rear of the server, install the adapter bracket on  
the rear of the server with a single screw B and a screw removed before.  
Screw removed from the rear of the server.  
Screw B  
8. Install the lock spring to the holes at the both sides of the AC inlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-13  
9. Loosen the three screws with which the slide bracket of the slide rail assemble is fixed.  
This step is required to match the length of the slide rail assembly with the depth of the  
rack (distance between the front and rear supports). If the three screws are loosened, the  
slide bracket may be slid in the front or rear direction.  
Screws  
10. Locate the slide rail assembly on the right side of the rack frame at the position defined by  
the template.  
Stamp of two circles  
(placed in 5U)  
Stamp (located at the upper  
right position of screw hole)  
Screw hole  
NOTES:  
„
Check the direction of installing the slide rail assembly.  
–
–
Make the bracket face facing the outside of the rack.  
Locate the side with the slide bracket at the rear of the rack.  
„
The front and rear supports of the rack have rectangular holes for  
screw fastening. For the NEC rack, round stamps are provided in 1U.  
As shown in the figure, locate the slide rail assembly so that a stamp  
is positioned at the upper right of the top screw hole of the slide rail  
assembly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-14 Setting Up Your Server  
11. Fix the slide rail assembly with four screws C (two on each of the front and rear sides) and  
four washers A (two on each of the front and rear sides).  
NOTES:  
„
Make sure that the frame tips on the slide rail assembly are contact  
to the rectangular hole frames of the rack properly and the four  
screw holes of the rail can be seen through the mating rectangular  
holes of the rack  
„
Check that the slide rail assembly is located to the level.  
12. Fasten the screws loosen in step 9 to fix the slide bracket.  
13. Install the other slide rail assembly on the left side of the rack in the same procedure as  
that described by steps 9 to 12 above.  
NOTE: Make sure that the slide rail assembly is installed at the same  
level as the other slide rail assembly already installed. For installing the  
server to the rack that has distance between the mount faces at the front  
and rear faces of the rack being 743 mm or longer, fix the slide rail  
assembly and arm stopper together with two screws C. (In this case,  
washers A is not necessary.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-15  
14. Hold the server by more than one person to mount it on the rack.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.  
■ Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.  
■ Do not push the release lever with fingers.  
Insert the rails on the side faces of the server into the slide rail assemblies securely and  
then push the server slowly and carefully. If the server is locked on the way, push the  
server slowly with the depression of the release lever on each of the left and right sides.  
Slide rail assembly  
Plastic portions  
Bearing rail  
Inner rail  
Mating portion  
Release lever  
IMPORTANT: Push each release lever using a driver or a similar tool.  
Pushing a release lever with your fingers may cause the fingers to be  
caught and thus injured.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-16 Setting Up Your Server  
NOTE: The slide rail assembly installed in the rack contains a slide  
rail called the bearing rail. The bearing rail can be moved freely in the  
slide rail assembly. To install the server in the rack securely, slide the  
bearing rail to the front of the rack to put the plastic components at the  
tip of the rail and the inner rail into the server.  
At the first installation, you may feel strong friction in pushing because the mechanical  
components cannot be completely engaged with each other. Push the server intensely.  
NOTE: While the server is pushed into the rack, the server may be  
locked and thus cannot be pushed any more. This is because the lock  
lever on the rail prohibits the server from being pushed into the rack  
any more. Set the lock lever to be on the level to release the lock and  
then push the server into the rack slowly.  
15. Install the cable arm on the rear of the server with two screws B.  
Drive two screws B to the rear of the server and the adapter bracket temporarily, insert the  
groove of the cable arm to the screws, and securely fasten the screws driven temporarily  
Cable arm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-17  
16. Install the arm bracket on the mount face at the rear of the rack or the slide rail assembly.  
Mount face  
Mount face  
NOTE: Two types of arm brackets are provided to be fit to any  
distance between the front and rear mount faces of the rack.  
Use arm bracket (700) if the distance between the front and rear mount  
faces of the rack is 700 or 743 mm. Use arm bracket (900) for the rack  
having the depth of 760 or 900 mm.  
„ For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 700 or 743  
mm:  
Fix the arm bracket (700) to the core nuts installed on the mount face of the rear of the  
rack with two screws C.  
Core nut installation  
position  
Arm bracket (700)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-18 Setting Up Your Server  
„ For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear faces of the rack being 760  
mm:  
Fix arm bracket (900) to the screw holes nearest to the rear face among the rear holes on  
the slide rail assembly using two screws D.  
Arm bracket (900)  
„ For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear faces of the rack being 900  
mm:  
Fix arm bracket 900 to the screw holes nearest to the front face among the rear holes on  
the slide rail assembly using two screws D.  
Arm bracket (900)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-19  
17. Install the other end of the cable arm on the arm bracket installed in step 16.  
„ For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 700 mm:  
Fix the arm bracket with two screws D and two washers B at the position shown in the  
figure below.  
Arm bracket (900)  
„ For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 743 mm:  
Fix the arm bracket with four screws D and four washers B at the position shown in the  
figure below.  
Arm bracket (900)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-20 Setting Up Your Server  
„ For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 760 or 900  
mm:  
Fix the arm bracket with four screws D and four washers B at the position shown in the  
figure below (the figure below shows the example with the distance between the mount  
faces at the front and rear of the rack being 900 mm).  
Arm bracket (900)  
18. Push the server into the rack once to check the installation position.  
NOTE: Make sure that the four screw holes at the upper left and right  
sides on the front of the server are fit to the core nuts installed in step 2.  
If the four positions are not fit at all, the slide rail assembly or the core  
nuts may be installed incorrectly. If so, the adjacent units cannot be  
installed without clearance. Confirm the installation positions and make  
the reinstallation from the first step.  
19. Pull out or push the server into the rack for several times to confirm that the slides move  
smoothly.  
20. Fix the server to the rack with four screws C and four washers A.  
Screws C and Washers A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-21  
21. Install the front bezel.  
Now the installation is completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-22 Setting Up Your Server  
Removal Procedure  
More than one person should remove the server from the rack.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3  
to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.  
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.  
■ Note high temperature.  
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.  
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.  
1. After confirming that the server is off-powered, remove the power cords and all interface  
cables connected to the server.  
2. Loosen two screws with which the cable arm is fixed to the rear of the server to remove  
the cable arm from the server.  
Cable arm  
Screws  
3. Release the security lock to remove the front bezel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-23  
4. Remove four screws C located at both side of the front face of the server to fix it.  
2
1
Unlock Lock  
5. Hold the handle to pull out the server from the rack slowly and carefully.  
The server clicks to be latched.  
6. Push the left and right release levers to release the latch and then pull out the server from  
the rack slowly.  
Release lever  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Push each release lever using a driver or a similar tool. Pushing a  
release lever with your fingers may cause the fingers to be caught  
and thus injured.  
„
Pull out the server slowly with the bottom supported by more than  
one person.  
„
„
Secure the power cord(s) and interface cables with a lock spring.  
Form the power cord with a slight slack at the AC inlet of the server.  
This is to prevent the power cord from coming off when the server  
is pulled out from the rack.  
„
Do not apply any pressure to the plug of the power cord.  
See the "Installation procedure" when the mechanical components of the rack are removed also.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-24 Setting Up Your Server  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for wide variety  
of peripheral devices on its front and rear. The figure on the next page illustrates available  
peripheral devices for the server in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the  
devices.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the NEC Express  
Server plugged to a power source.  
■ Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection.  
Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will  
cause malfunctions and failures (excluding the USB device).  
„
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the  
server, consult with your service representative for availability of  
such a device or cable. Some third-party devices may not be used  
for the server.  
„
„
The "100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector" and the "serial port B  
connector" of this server have the same shape. Be careful not to  
connect a cable to a wrong connector.  
A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port  
connectors.  
„
„
Secure the power cord(s) and interface cables with a lock spring.  
Form the cables in such a way that they will not come into contact  
with the door or the guide rails on the sides of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-25  
Device with the serial  
interface  
(e.g., Management PC)  
Device with the USB Interface  
(e.g., keyboard)  
FRONT  
Finally connect the provided  
power cord to the receptacle.  
If connecting the server to UPS,  
see the explanation below.  
When an optional power  
supply unit is additionally  
installed  
Printer with the  
parallel interface  
Device with the ICMB interface  
Device with the  
serial interface *2  
B
REAR  
100BASE TX/  
10BASE-T  
A
SCSI device*1  
1
1000BASE-T  
100BASE TX/  
10BASE-T  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Hub  
(multiport repeater)  
2
Device with the serial interface  
(e.g., modem)  
Direct connection to the private  
telephone line is prohibited.  
Network system  
on LAN  
(connected  
via a hub)  
Display unit  
Device with USB interface  
(e.g., terminal adapter)  
*1 To connect the external SCSI devices, change the baseboard cable connection.  
*2 A leased line cannot be connected directly to this connector. The console of a management PC can be connected to  
only serial port B. (BIOS setting required) Connect the console to only serial port B on either the front or rear panel.  
To connect the rear side serial port B, change the baseboard cable connection with rear side serial cable that comes  
with the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-26 Setting Up Your Server  
Connection to Serial Ports  
Various types of serial devices can be connected to the RJ-45 serial ports on the front or rear panels  
of the server. Some devices require the setting of the jumper pin (JP25) on the baseboard to be  
changed according to the DCD/DSR signal specification, or they need to be connected via an  
optional serial port conversion cable.  
There are two kind of cables in optional serial portconversion cable set. The "R" label is attached to  
one cable (used with this server), and the "F" label is attached to the other (not used with this server).  
Regarding to this cable set, contact your service representative for details.  
IMPORTANT: Inter-equipment potential difference may cause a  
server failure. Be sure to turn off the server and the connection-  
destination equipment and disconnect the power cord before  
connecting/disconnecting the cable to/from the serial port.  
The figure below shows the location of the jumper pin (JP25). For methods to dismount the cover  
and other internal components, see Chapter 9.  
* Factory-set  
: Strapped  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-27  
Connection between the RJ-45 Serial Port and a Modem  
To connect a modem to the RJ-45 serial port, use the optional "serial port conversion cable" with the  
"R" label attached. Be careful not to use the other one with the "F" label attached. Set the jumper  
pin to "DCD+DSR" (factory-set).  
IMPORTANT: Make sure of the icon of the server, and be sure to  
connect the cable to serial port B. Be careful not to connect to a LAN  
port by mistake.  
To prevent wrong connection, write "LAN port" on a tag and put the tag  
to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this server.  
Wiring block diagram of the internal cables:  
RJ-45 serial port  
Serial port conversion  
cable (with the R label  
attached)  
DTE-DCE straight cable  
DCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-28 Setting Up Your Server  
Connection between the RJ-45 Serial Port and a UPS  
To connect a UPS to the RJ-45 serial port, use the optional "serial port conversion cable" with the  
"R" label attached. Be careful not to use the other one with the "F" label attached. Set the jumper  
pin to "DCD+DSR" (factory-set).  
IMPORTANT: Make sure of the icon of the server, and be sure to  
connect the cable to serial port B. Be careful not to connect to a LAN  
port by mistake.  
To prevent wrong connection, write "LAN port" on a tag and put the tag  
to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this server.  
Wiring block diagram of the internal cables:  
RJ-45 serial port  
Serial port conversion  
cable (with the R label  
attached)  
UPS connection cable  
DCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-29  
Connection between the RJ-45 Serial Port and a Management PC (DB9), etc.  
To connect equipment such as a management PC having a DB9-type serial connector to the RJ-45  
serial port, use the optional "serial port conversion cable" with the "R" label attached. Be careful  
not to use the other one with the "F" label attached. Set the jumper pin to "DCD+DSR" (factory-  
set).  
IMPORTANT: Make sure of the icon of the server, and be sure to  
connect the cable to serial port B. Be careful not to connect to a LAN  
port by mistake.  
To prevent wrong connection, write "LAN port" on a tag and put the tag  
to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this server.  
Wiring block diagram of the internal cables:  
RJ-45 serial port  
Serial port conversion  
cable (with the R label  
attached)  
DTE-DTE cross cable  
DTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-30 Setting Up Your Server  
Connection between the RJ-45 Serial Port and Device Needing a DCD/DSR  
Signal  
If a "terminal concentrator" or the like is to be connected to the RJ-45 serial port, thoroughly read  
the instruction manuals of the connection-destination equipment and cable before starting the  
connection. Set the jumper pin of this server to "DCD" or "DSR" in accordance with the signal  
that the connection-destination equipment needs.  
The jumper settings and serial port signals of this server are as shown below. When directly  
connecting the server and a terminal concentrator or the like through an RJ-45 cable, prepare the  
cable according to the figure below.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
„
Make sure of the icon of the server, and be sure to connect the cable  
to serial port B. Be careful not to connect to a LAN port by  
mistake.  
To prevent wrong connection, write "LAN port" on a tag and put the  
tag to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this  
server.  
Be sure to observe the following items to prevent damage to this  
server and the peripheral device:  
–
–
–
When using a shielded cable (STP cable), confirm that the  
connector of the connection-destination equipment is compatible  
with the STP cable. Connect the equipment to the server  
through an STP cable of up to 15 m.  
When using an unshielded cable (UTP cable), confirm that the  
connection-destination equipment is mounted in the rack of the  
server or a rack linked with the server rack. Connect the  
equipment to the server through a UTP cable of up to 15 m.  
To prevent wrong connection, write "Serial port" on a tag and  
put the tag to the connector of the serial cable that is to be  
connected to this server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-31  
JP25  
: Strapped  
RJ-45 serial port  
Serial port conversion  
cable (with the R label  
attached)  
DTE-DTE cross cable  
DTE  
JP25  
: Strapped  
RJ-45 serial port  
Serial port conversion  
cable (with the R label  
attached)  
DTE-DTE cross cable  
DTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-32 Setting Up Your Server  
Connection to External SCSI Devices  
Two Ultra 320 SCSI connectors are equipped with the baseboard in your server.  
Ultra 320 SCSI (A) connector is used to connect the internal SCSI hard disk drives. Ultra 320 SCSI  
(B) connector is used to connect the internal 5.25-inch SCSI file device or external SCSI devices.  
The internal SCSI cable for 5.25-inch SCSI file device is connected to Ultra 320 SCSI (B)  
connector at the factory.  
To connect the external SCSI devices with your server, you must change the internal SCSI cable  
connection by using the attached external SCSI cable (see Chapter 9 for details).  
If your system can connect with the external SCSI devices, observe the following notices. (For notes  
on connecting the optional add-in SCSI card, refer to the manual that comes with the optional card.)  
„ Choose the SCSI ID between 0 and 6 that hasn't been assigned to any other SCSI device  
connected to your server.  
„ Enable the SCSI termination or connect the SCSI terminator to the device that is at the  
end of SCSI chain.  
„ Only one SCSI device can be connected to your server. (A maximum of two devices when  
N8141-28AF device expansion unit is connected.)  
„ Use the "SCSISelect" utility to make the setting for the connected SCSI device.  
„ When an external SCSI devices is connected, the device can operate at the transfer rate  
shown in the table below depending on the internal line length of the connected device  
and the total length of SCSI cables.  
Internal line length of  
external SCSI device and transfer rate  
total length of SCSI cables  
2 m or shorter*1  
Maximum  
[Sync Transfer  
Rate]  
in SCSISelect  
Data transfer  
width  
[MB/sec]  
20  
40  
Auto*2  
Auto*2  
Auto*2  
Narrow (8-bit)  
Wide (16-bit)  
Wide (16-bit)  
11 m or shorter  
(only for LVD)  
320, 160, 80  
*1 The total length of SCSI cables should be 1 m or shorter if the NB141-28AF device  
expansion unit is installed.  
*2 The value is set to "Auto" at the shipment. For some SCSI devices, the transfer  
rate may be restricted. To install a SCSI device, read the manual coming with the  
device carefully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-33  
CONNECTING POWER CORD  
Connect the provided power cord to the server.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-  
3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.  
■ Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of  
connections.  
■ Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
■ Use the authorized power cord only.  
1. Plug the provided power cord into the AC inlet on the rear of the server.  
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.  
3. Secure the power cord with a lock spring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-34 Setting Up Your Server  
To connect the power cord from the server to an interruptive power supply (UPS), use service  
outlets on the rear of the UPS.  
The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups: SWITCH OUT and UN-SWITCH OUT.  
(They may be called "OUTPUT1" and "OUTPUT2".)  
To control power supply with an application (NEC ESMPRO UPSController) that controls the UPS,  
connect the power cord to an SWITCH OUT outlet.  
For constant power supply, connect the power cord to a UN-SWITCH OUT outlet. (Connect the  
modem that is in service for 24 hours to this outlet.)  
<Example>  
2
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT(SWITCH OUT)  
(UNSWITCHOUT)  
AC100V 50/50HZ  
UN-SWITCH OUT  
(OUTPUT 2)  
SWITCH OUT  
(OUTPUT 1)  
When the power cord from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to link with  
power supply from the UPS.  
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" under the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility. See Chapter  
4 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-35  
TURNING ON THE SERVER  
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.  
IMPORTANT: Before turning on the server:  
„
Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before  
installation. If the server has a PCI board with the PCI-to-PCI  
bridge installed, the SETUP utility is enabled to launch. Check on  
the board specifications to find out whether it requires pre-  
installation setups before actually installing the board.  
„
Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices  
require setups before proceeding to the next step.  
To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic  
board, install a desired OS to the server.  
1. Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the CD-ROM drive  
contains no bootable CD-ROM.  
2. Press the POWER switch.  
NOTES:  
„
If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the  
UPS, turn on the power control unit.  
„
Connect the power cord and wait a few seconds before pressing the  
POWER switch. The POWER switch does not work in a few  
seconds after connecting the power cord due to BMC (Baseboard  
Management Controller) firmware start-up.  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
POWER switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-36 Setting Up Your Server  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on.  
In a few seconds, the NEC logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test (POST)  
begins.  
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard  
operation (Ctrl + Alt + Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets  
interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral devices, and boots the operating system (if  
installed). See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST.  
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating a  
fatal system error requiring immediate attention. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," for  
troubleshooting information.)  
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and  
test. Depending on the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to  
complete the memory test.  
NOTE: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen with the  
NEC logo screen. You can always change the NEC logo screen to the  
POST screen by pressing Esc. To change the start-up screen, use the  
BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility  
stored in ROM on system board or on an installed option board.  
Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup.  
For the BIOS SETUP for the server, see Chapter 4. For the BIOS SETUP for the option board,  
refer to the manual that comes with the option board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-37  
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM  
See Chapter 5 for installing the Microsoft Windows 2000.  
To install the other operating system listed above, contact your service representative.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup of your server.  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is a support software for the server.  
It simplifies the process of installing and configuring your server.  
See Chapter 6 for details on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„
Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and  
time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP". See Chapter 4 detail.  
INSTALLING UTILITIES  
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 6 for details.  
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the  
server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information by the following process.  
1. Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the  
system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Set a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-38 Setting Up Your Server  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Configuring Your Server  
This chapter describes Basic Input Output System (BIOS) configuration.  
When you install the server for the first time or install/remove optional devices, thoroughly read this  
chapter for better understanding and correct setups.  
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~  
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is  
pre-installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run.  
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best  
conditions. Thus, you don't need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might  
wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only.  
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is  
provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With  
the Supervisor password, you can view and change all system  
parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system  
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.  
„
„
Do not set any password before installing the OS.  
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog  
boxes appear on your SETUP utility, thus, may differ from  
descriptions in this manual. If you find anything unclear, see the  
online help or ask your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2 Configuring Your Server  
Starting SETUP Utility  
To run the SETUP utility, perform the following procedures:  
1. Turn on the power of the server.  
The NEC logo appears on the screen (the POST screen may appear depending on the  
setting in SETUP.).  
After a while, any of the following messages appears at the bottom of the screen.  
Pattern 1:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network  
Pattern 2:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network  
Or  
Pattern 3:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network  
Pattern 4:  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network  
* The displayed message varies depending on the device status.  
2. Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.  
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen  
appears. Enter the password.  
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly  
for three consecutive times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off  
the server.  
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password:  
Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and  
change all system parameters. With the User password, system  
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-3  
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage  
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at  
the bottom of the screen.)  
Setup item menu  
Indicates the current menu.  
Indicates there  
are submenus.  
Online help  
window  
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu  
Explanation of key functions  
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently  
selected.  
Cursor (↑, ↓):  
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, System Hardware, Boot, or  
Exit menu.  
Cursor (←, →):  
– and +:  
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a  
submenu option (an option preceded by "³") is selected, these  
keys are disabled.  
Enter  
Esc  
F1:  
Press Enter to select (determine) parameters.  
Displays the previous screen.  
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help  
screen for SETUP operations appears. Press Esc to return to the  
previous screen.  
F9:  
Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the  
factory set parameter.  
F10:  
Sets the parameter back to the one stored by the server before the  
SETUP utility was started.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 Configuring Your Server  
Configuration Examples  
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for  
system operations.  
Link with Management Software  
To link with the temperature monitoring feature of NEC ESMPRO Agent  
Select [Server] - [Thermal Sensor] - [Enabled].  
To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network  
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake On Lan] - [Enabled].  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].  
UPS  
To link power supply with the UPS  
„ To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Power On].  
„ To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER  
switch was used to power off  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Last State].  
„ To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].  
Boot  
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server  
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.  
To display POST check results  
Select [Advanced] - [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] - [Enabled].  
You can also press Esc while the NEC log is on the screen to display POST check results.  
To control from the HW console  
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection] and set each item.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-5  
Memory  
To enable the memory degradation feature  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].  
To check the installed memory (DIMM board) status  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] and check the status indications.  
The on-screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the baseboard are associated  
as shown in the following figure.  
To clear the memory (DIMM board) error information  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.  
DIMM group #3  
DIMM group #2  
DIMM group #1  
DIMM group #3  
DIMM group #2  
DIMM group #1  
To enable the memory mirroring / online sparing memory feature  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Online Sparing/Mirroring Memory] and  
set each.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6 Configuring Your Server  
CPU  
To enable the CPU degradation feature  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].  
To check the installed CPU status  
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] and check the status indications.  
The on-screen CPU numbers and socket locations on the baseboard are associated as  
shown in the following figure.  
To clear the CPU error information  
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.  
Processor (CPU) #3  
Processor (CPU) #4  
Processor (CPU) #2  
Processor (CPU) #1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-7  
Security  
To set passwords on the BIOS  
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.  
Supervisor password and User password can be set separately, and only User password  
has a restriction to access to SETUP utility.  
To enable/disable the POWER switch and DUMP switch  
„ To disable  
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Enabled].  
„ To enable  
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Disabled].  
IMPORTANT: Enabling [Power Switch Inhibit] disables forced  
shutdown (see Chapter 8) as well as power on/off using the POWER  
switch.  
To set the secure mode  
Select [Security] - [Secure Mode] and set each item.  
External Devices  
To set up external devices  
Select [Advanced] - [I/O Device Configuration] and set up each device.  
Internal Devices  
To set up internal PCI devices of the server  
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] and set up each device.  
To clear the hardware configuration data (after installing/removing internal devices)  
Select [Advanced] - [Reset Configuration Data] - [Yes].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8 Configuring Your Server  
PCI Hot Plug  
To install the PCI board with the PCI hot plug  
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] -  
[Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]  
* The setting varies depending on the PCI board subject to the hot plug. See the table  
below.  
N code  
N8104-85F  
N8104-103F  
Board name  
100BASE-TX Adapter  
1000BASE-T Adapter  
Setting Value  
Minimum  
Minimum  
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Empty Bus Default  
Speed] - [PCI Slots 5-6*]/[PCI Slots 7-8*] and set the frequency of the boards to be  
installed.  
* If the hot plugs are provided for PCI Slot 5-6 or PCI Slot 7-8, previously set the speeds  
of the slots to meet those of the boards to be installed.  
Saving the Configuration Data  
To save the BIOS configuration data  
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] or [Save Changes].  
To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data  
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes] or [Discard Changes].  
To resume the default BIOS configuration data (may differ from factory-set value)  
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].  
To save the current value as user default  
Select [Exit] - [Save Custom Defaults].  
To load the user-defined default  
Select [Exit] - [Load Custom Defaults].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-9  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions  
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:  
„ Main  
„ Advanced  
„ Security  
„ Server  
„ Boot  
„ Exit  
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes  
available functions and parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.  
Main  
After entering SETUP, the Main menu appears first. To display a submenu, position the cursor on  
a selection that has a submenu (preceded by symbol ³) and press Enter.  
The items which can be set on the Main menu screen and their functions are described below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Set the time.  
Set the date.  
Set the settings of floppy disk  
drive A (standard configuration).  
Normally set to "1.44/1.25MB  
3.5".  
Your Setting  
System Time  
System Date  
Legacy Floppy A  
HH:MM:SS  
MM/DD/YYYY  
Disabled  
1.2MB  
720Kb  
[1.44/1.25MB 3.5"]  
5.25"  
3.5"  
2.88MB  
[Disabled]  
1.2MB  
720Kb  
1.44/1.25MB 3.5"  
3.5"  
Legacy Floppy B  
Set the settings of floppy disk  
drive B.  
Set to "Disabled" since the  
server does not support drive B.  
5.25"  
3.5"  
2.88MB  
3.5"  
Hard Disk Pre-Delay  
[Disabled]  
3 seconds  
6 seconds  
9 seconds  
12 seconds  
15 seconds  
21 seconds  
30 seconds  
–
Set the waiting time in first  
accessing to the IDE device  
during POST.  
Primary IDE  
Master/Primary IDE  
Slave  
Set the information on the device  
connected to each channel on  
the submenu. The settings of  
some items may be changed.  
However, leave the items as they  
are at the shipment.  
Language  
English (US)  
French  
Select the language used for  
SETUP.  
German  
Spanish  
Italian  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-11  
Processor Settings  
Selecting "Processor Settings" on the Main menu shows the following submenu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Processor Retest  
[No]  
Yes  
–
Clears the error information on the  
CPU.  
Processor Speed  
Setting  
Indicates the frequency of the CPU.  
Processor 1-4  
CPUID  
–
A numeral indicates the ID of  
processor. "Disabled" indicates that  
the processor is defected by BMC.  
"Not Installed" indicates that the  
processor is not installed.  
(Display only)  
Processor 1-4  
L2 Cache Size  
Processor 1-4  
L3 Cache Size  
–
–
Indicates the L2 cache of processor.  
Indicates the L3 cache of processor.  
Hyper-Threading  
Technology  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Setting this item to "Enabled" allows  
the hyper-threading technology to be  
used in the ACPI mode. From OS that  
supports Hyper-Threading Technology  
feature, the specified number of  
processors is twice as many as the  
actual number of the installed  
processors.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12 Configuring Your Server  
Primary IDE Master/Primary IDE Slave  
Selecting "Primary IDE Master" or "Primary IDE Slave" on the Main menu shows the following  
submenu.  
See the following table for the items.  
Option  
Type  
Parameter  
[Auto]  
None  
Description  
Your Setting  
Set the IDE device to be the master.  
The selection of "Auto" causes the  
device to be detected automatically  
during execution of POST.  
CD-ROM  
IDE Removable  
ATAPI Removable  
Other ATAPI User  
1-2048  
"None" disables the connected device.  
Cylinders  
Heads  
Indicates the number of cylinders  
(display only). *1, *2  
Indicates the number of read/write  
heads (display only). *1, *2  
Indicates the number of sectors on  
each track (display only). *1, *2  
Indicates the drive capacity (display  
only). *2  
1-16  
1-64  
–
Sectors  
Maximum  
Capacity  
Multi-Sector  
Transfers  
[Disabled]  
2 Sectors  
4 Sectors  
8 Sectors  
16 Sectors  
Indicates the status of multi-sector  
transfer controlled by BIOS. *3  
LBA Mode Control [Disabled]  
Enabled  
Indicates the status of the LBA  
(Logical Block Access) controlled by  
BIOS. *3  
32 Bit I/O  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the 32-bit IDE data  
transfer is enabled or disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-13  
Option  
Transfer Mode  
Parameter  
[Standard]  
Fast PIO 1  
Fast PIO 2  
Fast PIO 3  
Fast PIO 4  
FPIO 3/DMA 1  
FPIO 4/DMA 4  
[Disabled]  
Mode 0  
Description  
Your Setting  
Indicates the data transfer mode  
between drives controlled by BIOS. *3  
Ultra DMA Mode  
Indicates the Ultra-DMA mode of data  
transfer between drives controlled by  
BIOS. *3  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Mode 4  
[
]: Factory-set  
*1 Selectable only when the Type is set to "User".  
*2 Displayed only when the Type is set to "User".  
*3 Displayed only when the Type is set to "Auto".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14 Configuring Your Server  
Advanced  
The Advanced menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of "Advanced."  
To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu (preceded by symbol  
³) and press Enter.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
Boot-time  
Diagnostic  
Screen  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the self-diagnosis (POST)  
running screen is displayed or not on booting.  
If this item is set to "Disabled," the "NEC" logo  
appears during POST. (Pressing Esc in the  
status causes the screen display to be switched  
to the POST execution screen.  
The Boot-time Diagnostic Screen is  
automatically enabled if the Console  
Redirection is enabled.  
Reset  
Configuration  
Data  
[No]  
Yes  
Select "Yes" to clear the extended system  
configuration data area (system information  
stored by POST). The parameter is changed  
to "No" after the system is booted.  
NumLock  
On  
Specify whether the numlock is enabled or  
disabled on booting.  
[Off]  
[Boot]  
Halt  
Memory/  
Processor Error  
Indicates whether POST is paused once at the  
occurrence of a CPU or memory error during  
the execution of POST.  
When CPU error or Memory error is  
encountered, the utility is not paused at the end  
of POST if this item is set to "Halt" and even  
though "POST Error Pause" of "Server" menu  
is "Enabled".  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-15  
Memory Configuration  
Selecting "Memory Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
DIMM Group #1 -  
#3 Status  
Parameter  
Normal  
Not installed  
Disabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Indicates the current memory status.  
"Normal" indicates that the memory  
devices operate normally.  
"Disabled" indicates that one or more  
memory devices are defected.  
"Not Installed" indicates that no  
memory devices are installed.  
(Display only)  
Memory Retest  
[No]  
Yes  
Clears the DIMM group error status  
information.  
Extended RAM  
Step  
1MB  
1KB  
Every-Location  
[Disabled]  
"1MB" indicates that the memory test  
is done in the unit of 1MB. "1KB"  
indicates that the memory test is done  
in the unit of 1KB. "Every-Location"  
indicates that every memory device is  
tested. "Disabled" indicates that only  
memory initialization is done.  
Online  
Sparing/Mirroring  
Memory  
[Disabled]  
Sparing  
Mirroring  
Specify whether the Memory Mirroring  
/ Online Spare Memory feature is  
enabled or disabled.  
See Chapter 9 for details.  
[
]: Factory-set  
NOTES:  
„
To enable memory mirroring /online spare memory feature, memory  
boards in DIMM group #1 and #3 must be the same capacities and  
type.  
„
Contact your service representative if you need to use these features.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16 Configuring Your Server  
PCI Configuration  
Selecting "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Selecting an  
item on the screen allows the proper submenu to appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-17  
Hot-plug PCI Control  
Selecting "Hot-plug PCI Control" on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen.  
See the table blow for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Minimum  
Middle  
Description  
Your Setting  
Reserving  
memory space for  
PHP  
Determines memory space at every  
empty slot for PHP (PCI Hot-plug).  
Reserved memory space is:  
[Disabled]  
Maximum  
None  
[Minimum]  
6 (2+4) MB  
[Middle]  
48 (16+32) MB  
[Maximum]  
96 (32+64) MB  
Empty Bus Default  
Speed  
-
Refer to Empty Bus Default Speed  
submenu.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18 Configuring Your Server  
Empty Bus Default Speed  
Selecting " Empty Bus Default Speed " on the Hot-plug PCI Control submenu shows the following  
screen.  
See the table blow for the item.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
PCI Slot 5-6  
PCI Slot 7-8  
[PCI 33MHz]  
PCI 66MHz  
PCI-X 66MHz  
PCI-X 100MHz  
Selects the types of PCI board and  
frequency to be installed to the PCI  
slots 5 – 6 or 7 – 8.  
The parameter must be selected  
before installing the PCI board with  
hot-plug (This option is ignored and  
appropriate parameter of the installed  
board is applied to the slot by the  
system after installing the board and  
rebooting the system.).  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-19  
Embedded SCSI/Embedded NIC/Embedded Video Controller  
Selecting "Embedded SCSI", "Embedded NIC", or "Embedded Video Controller" on the PCI  
Configuration submenu shows the following screen.  
See the table blow for the items.  
Option  
SCSI Controller  
Parameter Description  
[Enabled]  
Indicates whether the on-board  
Your Setting  
controller is enabled or disabled.  
LAN Controller 1 (10/100) Disabled  
LAN Controller 2 (Gbit)  
Video Controller  
Option ROM Scan*  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Displays the submenu for indicating  
whether the expansion of BIOS of on-  
board controller is enabled or  
disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
* Only displayed for SCSI and LAN controllers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20 Configuring Your Server  
PCI Slot 1 – PCI Slot 8  
Selecting each menu on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen.  
See the table for the item.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Option ROM Scan [Enabled]  
Disabled  
Disables/enables the Option ROM  
BIOS on the PCI bus. When the  
graphic accelerator board is installed  
or the disk array controller or SCSI  
controller boards to be installed are  
connected to the hard disk in which  
OS is installed, set this item to  
"Enabled." When the LAN controller  
board with installation of the option  
ROM BIOS is used but the board does  
not provide network booting, set this  
item to "Disabled."  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-21  
I/O Device Configuration  
Selecting "I/O Device Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen..  
See the table below for the items.  
IMPORTANT: Note that the interrupt and/or base I/O address are not  
overlapped with others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/O  
address is used in another resource, the yellow asterisk (*) appears.  
Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Serial Port A  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Auto  
Description  
Specify whether serial port A is  
enabled or disabled.  
Your Setting  
Base I/O Address  
[3F8]  
2F8  
3E8  
2E8  
Selects the base address and interrupt  
(IRQ) for serial port A. These menus  
are displayed if the Serial port A is  
enabled.  
Interrupt  
IRQ 3  
[IRQ 4]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Auto  
Serial Port B  
Specify whether serial port B is  
enabled or disabled.  
Base I/O Address  
3F8  
[2F8]  
3E8  
2E8  
Selects the base address and interrupt  
(IRQ) for serial port B. These menus  
are displayed if the Serial port B is  
enabled.  
Interrupt  
[IRQ 3]  
IRQ 4  
Parallel Port  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Auto  
Specify whether the parallel port is  
enabled or disabled.  
Mode  
Output Only  
Bi-directional  
EPP  
[ECC]  
[378]  
Selects the parallel port operation  
mode, base address, interrupt (IRQ),  
and DMA channel for the parallel port.  
These menus are displayed if the  
Parallel Port is enabled.  
Base I/O Address  
Interrupt  
278  
IRQ 5  
[IRQ 7]  
[DMA 1]  
DMA 3  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
DMA channel  
Legacy USB  
Support  
Specify whether the USB keyboard is  
made available in OS which does not  
support USB formally.  
PS/2 Mouse  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Specify whether the mouse is enabled  
or disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-23  
Advanced Chipset Control  
Selecting "Advanced Chipset Control" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen.  
Positioning the cursor on a menu (item preceded by symbol "³") and pressing Enter allows the  
appropriate submenu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Wake On LAN  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Specify whether the remote power-on  
function through network is enabled or  
disabled.  
Wake On Ring  
Sleep Button  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the remote power-on  
function through a serial port is  
enabled or disabled.  
Determine whether SLEEP switch is  
masked or unmasked. Selecting  
"Absent" disables the SLEEP switch  
after booting up.  
[Present]  
Absent  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24 Configuring Your Server  
PCI Device  
Selecting "PCI Device" on "Advanced Chipset Control" of the Advanced menu shows the following  
screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
PCI IRQ line 1 - 14 Disabled  
PCI IRQ line 17-32 [Auto Select]  
Set the assignment of each of 16  
interrupt signals on the PCI bus to a  
specific IRQ request.  
3
Parameters "5," "10," and "11" cannot  
be selected if they are the same as  
those set for BMC IRQ in the Server  
menu.  
4
5
7
9
10  
11  
14  
15  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-25  
Security  
Positioning the cursor to "Security" shows the following screen.  
Selectable only when  
User Password is  
registered  
If you press Enter with the selection of either "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password,"  
such a screen as shown below appears (the screen shown in the figure below appears when "Set  
Supervisor Password" is selected).  
Specify the passwords on the dialog box. Enter each of the passwords with up to seven characters  
including alphanumerics and symbols.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Set the passwords only after OS is installed.  
If you forget the passwords, contact your service representative.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Set User  
Password  
Up to seven  
alphanumeics  
Press Enter to display the user password  
input screen. For this password,  
accessing to the SETUP menu is  
restricted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Set Supervisor  
Password  
Up to seven  
alphanumeics  
Press Enter to display the supervisor  
password input screen. This password  
enables all the SETUP menus to be  
accessed. This setting can be done only  
on login with the password input of  
"Supervisor" at start of SETUP.  
Specify whether the passwords are  
entered or not on booting. At first the  
supervisor password must be set. If the  
supervisor password is set and this option  
is invalid, BIOS determines that a user is  
booting.  
Password on boot [Disabled]  
Enabled  
Fixed disk boot  
sector  
Secure Mode  
Timer  
[Normal]  
Write Protect  
2 min  
Prevents data from being written to hard  
disks.  
Specify the period from no input from the  
keyboard or mouse to the point at which  
the system enters into the secure mode.  
5 min  
10 min  
20 min  
1 hr  
[2 hr]  
Hot Key  
(CTRL+ALT+)  
[L]  
Specify the key with which the secure  
mode is started. Press the selected key  
with the Ctrl and Alt pressed to start the  
secure mode.  
Secure Mode Boot [Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the server is operated in  
the secure mode at the start of the server.  
Specify whether the monitor is  
Video Blanking  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
disconnected if the server is entered into  
the secure mode.  
Floppy Write  
Protect  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether data write to the floppy  
disk inserted into the floppy disk drive is  
enabled or disabled in the secure mode.  
Specify whether the power switch is  
enabled or disabled. If this item is set to  
"Enabled," the power cannot be turned off  
by using the POWER switch (including the  
forced shutdown). The system cannot  
also enter the power saving mode by  
pressing the SLEEP switch.  
Power Switch  
Inhibit  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
[
]: Factory-set  
NOTE: The Secure Mode is used to restrict access from unauthorized  
users. In the Secure Mode, the POWER switch, SLEEP switch, RESET  
switch, keyboard and mouse are disabled. The lamps on the keyboard  
flash in order from the ScrollLock lamp, the CapsLock lamp, and the  
NumLock lamp. To resume server operation in the normal state from  
the Secure Mode, enter the user password from the keyboard and press  
Enter key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-27  
Server  
Positioning the cursor on "Server" shows the Server menu.  
The items which can be set on the Server menu and their functions are described below. For the  
setting, first select "System Management" or "Console Redirection" and press Enter to display the  
proper submenu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Service  
Partition  
Type  
Parameter  
–
Description  
Indicates the type of the service partition.  
Your Setting  
Clear Event [Press Enter]  
Log  
Press Enter and select "Yes" to initialize the  
system event log.  
Assert NMI Disabled  
Indicates whether PCI PERR is supported or  
not.  
on PERR  
[Enabled]  
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers  
an error through the NMI when an error  
occurred.  
Assert NMI Disabled  
Indicates whether PCI SERR is supported or  
not.  
on SERR  
[Enabled]  
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers  
an error through the NMI when an error  
occurred.  
FRB-2  
Policy  
Disable FRB2 Timer Set this item to "Disable BSP".  
[Disable BSP]  
Do Not Disable BSP  
Retry 3 Times  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Boot  
Monitoring  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
5 Minutes  
Description  
Your Setting  
Indicates whether the boot monitoring  
function is enabled or disabled on booting.  
To use this function, install NEC ESMPRO  
Agent. Do not use this function if the system  
is booted from OS without installation of NEC  
ESMPRO Agent or CD-ROM. Set this item to  
"Disabled" if ARCServe uses the Disaster  
Recovery Option.  
10 Minutes  
15 Minutes  
20 Minutes  
25 Minutes  
30 Minutes  
35 Minutes  
40 Minutes  
45 Minutes  
50 Minutes  
55 Minutes  
60 Minutes  
[Retry 3 Times]  
Retry Service Boot  
Always Retest  
Boot  
Monitoring  
Policy  
Appears when the boot monitoring feature is  
enabled. This item indicates the processing  
at the occurrence of timeout during boot  
monitoring.  
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the system is  
reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS  
boot is retried up to three times. The failure in  
the third boot causes the boot to be tried from  
the service partition.  
If [Retry Service Boot] is selected, the system  
is reset after the occurrence of timeout and  
OS boot is retried up to three times. Then the  
boot is tried from the service partition for  
three times.  
If [Always Reset] is selected, the system is  
reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS  
boot is retried repeatedly.  
Thermal  
Sensor  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
5
Indicates whether the temperature sensor  
monitoring function is enabled or disabled.  
BMC IRQ  
Indicates the IRQ of the BMC interrupt.  
10  
[11]  
Post Error  
Pause  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Indicates whether POST is aborted once at  
the end of POST if an error occurs during the  
execution of POST.  
AC-LINK  
Stay Off  
[Last State]  
Power On  
Indicates the AC-LINK function. Shows the  
state of the power of the server.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-29  
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on  
again, depending on the setting of "AC-LINK."  
Setting of AC-LINK  
System status before AC power off  
Stay Off  
Off  
Last State  
Power On  
Operating  
Aborting (DC power being off also)  
Forced shutdown  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
* Press the power switch continuously at least four seconds. This forcibly turns off the power.  
IMPORTANT: Set this item to "Power on" in order to link the AC  
power source supplied from UPS when the server is connected to UPS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30 Configuring Your Server  
System Management  
Selecting "System Management" on the Server menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
BIOS Version  
–
Indicates the version of BIOS.  
(Display only)  
Board Part #  
Board Serial #  
System Part #  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Indicates the baseboard information.  
(Display only)  
Indicates the system information.  
(Display only)  
System Serial #  
Chassis Part #  
Chassis Serial #  
BMC Device ID  
BMC Device Rev  
BMC Firmware Rev  
BMC BBFirmware Rev  
IPMI Rev  
Indicates the chassis information.  
(Display only)  
Indicates the BMC (Baseboard  
Management Controller) information.  
(Display only)  
Indicates the version of Intelligent  
Platform Management Interface (IPMI)  
supported by BMC.  
SDR Rev  
–
–
–
Indicates the revision of SDR (Sensor  
Data Record). (Display only)  
Indicates the revision of PIA.  
(Display only)  
Indicates the revision of the primary  
HSBP (Hot-Swap Back Plane) board  
normally installed. (Display only)  
PIA Rev  
Primary HSBP Rev  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-31  
Console Redirection  
Selecting "Console Redirection" on the Server menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Serial Port  
Address  
[Disabled]  
On-Board Com A  
On-Board Com B  
Selects the port to be used as the  
redirection port. The parameters  
specified in I/O device configuration  
submenu is used as address and  
interrupt.  
ACPI Redirection  
Port  
[Disabled]  
On-Board Com A  
On-Board Com B  
Specify the I/O port address or  
interrupt level used in ACPI headless  
console redirection.  
If [Disabled] is selected, console  
redirection feature is disabled.  
Baud Rate  
[9600]  
19.2k  
38.4k  
Specify the baud rate used for the  
interface with successive hardware  
consoles.  
57.6k  
115.2k  
Flow Control  
Console Type  
None  
Specify the flow control method.  
Specify the console type.  
XON/XOFF  
CTS/RTS  
[CTS/RTS+CD]  
PC ANSI  
[VT100+]  
VT-UTF8  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Remote Console  
Reset  
Specify whether the reset from remote  
console is enabled or disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-32 Configuring Your Server  
Boot  
Positioning the cursor on "Boot" shows the Boot menu which is used to set the boot priority.  
The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting. Finding the boot software,  
the server starts the software.  
The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the ↑, ↓, +, and - keys. Move the cursor  
to the desired device with the ↑ or ↓ key and change the priority with the + or - key.  
IMPORTANT: To boot NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, set the priority of  
the devices as shown in the figure above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-33  
Exit  
Positioning the cursor to "Exit" shows the Exit menu.  
The options on the menu are described below.  
Exit Saving Changes  
Select this item to terminate SETUP after saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-  
volatile memory). The selection of "Exit Saving Changes" causes the confirmation screen to  
appear.  
If you select "Yes," SETUP is terminated with the newly selected information saved in CMOS (non-  
volatile memory). Then the server automatically reboots the system.  
Exit Discarding Changes  
Select this item to terminate SETUP without saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-  
volatile memory).  
Selecting "Yes" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If the  
setting value is modified, the confirmation screen will appear.  
Selecting "No" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If you  
select "Yes" in the next screen, SETUP is terminated with the modified information saved in CMOS.  
Then the server automatically reboots the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34 Configuring Your Server  
Load Setup Defaults  
Select this item to return all the values of SETUP to the default values. Selecting "Load Setup  
Defaults" causes the confirmation screen to appear.  
Select "Yes" to return the values to the default values. Select "No" to return to the Exit menu  
screen.  
Load Custom Defaults  
If you select this menu and press Enter, the saved custom default values are loaded.  
Save Custom Defaults  
If you select this menu and press Enter, the parameters set currently are saved as the custom default  
values. After the storage, the Load Custom Defaults menu appears.  
Discard Changes  
Select this item to return the values modified currently to the previous values before saving the  
values to CMOS. Selecting "Discard Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.  
Select "Yes" to discard the newly selected information and return to the previous values.  
Save Changes  
Select this item to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory) without the  
termination of SETUP. Selecting "Save Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.  
Select "Yes" to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-35  
SCSI BIOS ~ SCSISelect ~  
The SCSISelect utility is provided to configure the SCSI controller on the baseboard (or the SCSI  
controller on an optional board). This utility may be started with a simple key operation while  
POST is in progress and requires no specific start-up disk.  
Using SCSISelect Utility  
Use the SCSISelect utility mainly to set the transfer speed of connected SCSI devices. The SCSI  
devices include those installed in the 5.25-inch device bays and backup devices, such as an external  
DAT and MO, but not hard disks.  
IMPORTANT: SCSI configuration must be made on a per-SCSI  
controller basis with a utility. The server contains one SCSI controller.  
When you added optional SCSI controllers, you need to make  
configuration for each SCSI controller in addition to the standard  
internal SCSI controller. Some additional SCSI controllers may  
require a different utility to make changes to the configuration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36 Configuring Your Server  
Configuring SCSI Controller on Baseboard  
The following describes configuration for the SCSI controller on the baseboard of the server.  
Running the Utility  
To run the utility, perform the following procedures:  
1. Power on the Express server.  
Press Esc to display the POST execution screen when the following message appears  
under the NEC logo.  
Press <ESC> to enter boot selection menu  
The following message appears while POST is in progress.  
IMPORTANT: The message appears for each additional SCSI  
controller.  
Adaptec SCSI BIOS v4.10  
(c) 2002 Adaptec, Inc. All Rights Reserved  
ꢀꢀꢀPress <Ctrl> <A> for SCSISelect(TM) Utility! ꢁꢁꢁ  
2. Press and hold Ctrl and A.  
The SCSISelect utility starts and then, the channel selection menu appears.  
3. Select "AIC-7902 A at slot 00 01:04:00" or "AIC-7902 B at slot 00 01:04:01" in the  
channel selection with the cursor keys and press Enter.  
AIC-7902 A at slot 00 01:04:00  
AIC-7902 B at slot 00 01:04:01  
The baseboard is provided with two SCSI controller channels. Channel A (01:04:00)  
indicates the Ultra 320 SCSI connector (for hard disks); and Channel B (01:04:01)  
indicates the Ultra 320 SCSI connector (for 5.25-inch devices and external SCSI devices).  
Select the device number in the box and press Enter.  
The Options menu appears.  
4. Select "Option" and press Enter.  
Options  
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings  
SCSI Disk Utilities  
If you wish to format a disk, verify disk media, or display a list of devices and their SCSI  
Ids, select "SCSI Disk Utilities". If you wish to configure the adapter or a device, select  
"Configure/View Host Adapter Settings".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-37  
Exiting the Utility  
To exit the utility, press Esc until a message prompts you to exit (if you changed any setting, you are  
prompted to save the changes before you exit).  
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings  
The Configure/View Host Adapter Settings has the following menu items and parameters. Read  
descriptions to select a correct parameter for each menu item.  
Configuration  
SCSI Bus Interface Definitions  
SCSI Controller ID -------------------------------------------  
SCSI Controller Parity---------------------------------------  
SCSI Controller Termination -------------------------------  
7
Enabled  
Automatic  
Additional Options  
Boot Device Configuration ---------------------------------  
SCSI Device Configuration----------------------------------  
Advanced Configuration ------------------------------------  
Press<Enter>  
Press<Enter>  
Press<Enter>  
<F6> - Reset to Host Adapter Defaults  
SCSI Bus Interface Definitions  
To set three menu items under "SCSI Bus Interface Definitions", select a menu item with the cursor  
keys (↓ or ↑) and press Enter to fix the item. Use the cursor keys (↓ or ↑) for parameter selection.  
The following table lists menu items, available parameters, and descriptions.  
Menu item  
SCSI Controller ID  
SCSI Controller Parity  
Parameter  
0 - [7] - 15  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Description  
Select "7".  
Select "Enabled".  
SCSI Controller  
Termination  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Enable or disable the SCSI termination.  
Select "Enabled".  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38 Configuring Your Server  
Additional Options  
To set three menu items under "Additional Options", select a menu item with the cursor keys (↓ or  
↑) and press Enter to display its submenu. Then, select a submenu item with the cursor keys (↓ or  
↑) and press Enter to fix the item. Use the cursor keys (↓ or ↑) for parameter selection.  
„ Boot Device Configuration  
Move the cursor onto "Boot Device Configuration" and press Enter to display the  
following submenu.  
Boot Device Configuration  
Single Image  
Master SCSI Controller ----------------------------  
AIC 7902 A at slot 00 01:04:00  
The following table lists submenu items, available parameters, and descriptions.  
Submenu item  
Parameter  
Description  
Master SCSI Controller  
–
Indicates the channel defined as the  
master SCSI controller. (display only)  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-39  
„ SCSI Device Configuration  
Move the cursor onto "SCSI Device Configuration" and press Enter to display the  
following submenu.  
SCSI Device Configuration  
SCSI Device ID  
#0  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
#7  
Sync Transfer Rate (MB/Sec) ------------ 320  
Packetized ------------------------------------- Yes  
QAS ---------------------------------------------- No  
Initiate Wide Negotiation ------------------ Yes  
Enable Disconnection --------------------- Yes  
Send Start Unit Command --------------- Yes  
BIOS Multiple LUN Support -------------- No  
Include in BIOS Scan ---------------------- Yes  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
SCSI Device ID  
#8  
#9  
#10  
#11  
#12  
#13  
#14  
#15  
Sync Transfer Rate (MB/Sec) ------------ 320  
Packetized ------------------------------------- Yes  
QAS ---------------------------------------------- No  
Initiate Wide Negotiation ------------------ Yes  
Enable Disconnection --------------------- Yes  
Send Start Unit Command --------------- Yes  
BIOS Multiple LUN Support -------------- No  
Include in BIOS Scan ---------------------- Yes  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
320  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
The following table lists submenu items, available parameters, and descriptions.  
IMPORTANT: Select a parameter for each submenu item on a per-  
SCSI ID basis. Verify the SCSI ID of a desired device before  
configuration.  
NOTE: To find out the SCSI ID for the optional device connected,  
select "SCSI Disk Utilities" on the Options menu and press Enter.  
See "SCSI Disk Utilities" for detail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-40 Configuring Your Server  
Submenu item  
Sync Transfer Rate  
(MB/Sec)  
Parameter  
Description  
Select "320".  
You may need to change the value  
depending on your optional device.  
Refer to the manual that comes with your  
optional device for details.  
[320]  
160  
26.8  
20.0  
16.0  
13.4  
10.0  
ASYN  
80.0  
53.4  
40.0  
32.0  
[Yes]  
No  
Packetized  
QAS  
Optimizes bus utilization and minimizes  
command overhead to bolster performance  
by transferring commands, data, and status  
using Deal Transition (DT) data phases.  
Quick Arbitration and Selection (QAS)  
reduces the overhead of control release on  
the SCSI bus from one device to another to  
help decrease command overhead and  
increase bus utilization.  
Yes  
[No]  
Initiate Wide  
Negotiation  
[Yes]  
No  
Select "Yes" if your SCSI device supports the  
Wide SCSI interface. Select "No" if not.  
Enable Disconnection [Yes]  
No  
Select "Yes".  
Send Start Unit  
Command  
[Yes]  
No  
Select "Yes" to send the command to the  
hard disk. Otherwise select "No".  
BIOS Multiple LUN  
Support  
Yes  
[No]  
[Yes]  
No  
Select "No".  
Include in BIOS Scan  
Select "Yes".  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-41  
„ Advanced Configuration  
Move the cursor onto "Advanced Configuration" and press Enter to display the following  
submenu.  
Advanced Configuration  
Reset SCSI Bus at IC Initialization ------------------------------------------------- Enabled  
Display <Ctrl><A> Message During BIOS Initialization------------------------- Enabled  
Extended Int 13 Translation for DOS Driver > 1 GByte------------------------- Enabled  
POST Display Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------- Diagnostic  
SCSI Controller Int 13 Support ----------------------------------------------------- Enabled  
Options Listed Below Have NO EFFECT if Int 13 Support is Disabled  
Domain Validation ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Enabled  
Support Removable Disks Under Int 13 as Fixed Disks -------------------------- Disabled  
BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM------------------------------------------------- Enabled  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-42 Configuring Your Server  
The following table lists submenu items, available parameter, and descriptions.  
Submenu item  
Parameter  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Description  
Reset SCSI Bus at  
IC Initialization  
Select "Enabled".  
Display <Ctrl><A>  
Message During  
BIOS Initialization  
Select "Enabled".  
Select "Enabled".  
Select "Diagnostic".  
Extended Int 13  
Translation for DOS  
Driver > 1 GByte  
POST Display Mode Verbose  
Silent  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Diagnostic]  
SCSI Controller Int  
13 Support  
[Enabled]  
Enable or disable SCSI BIOS.  
Select "Enabled" for most cases other than the  
following:  
• To boot the OS from a hard disk connected to  
any other controller than SCSI controller on  
the baseboard. (If the controller on the  
baseboard has no hard disks connected, there  
is no problem.)  
Disabled:  
NOT Scan  
Disabled:  
scan bus  
• BIOS of the SCSI controller may be disabled to  
reserve an area in the expansion ROM space  
if the controller has no hard disks connected.  
Domain Validation  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Select "Enabled".  
Support Removable Boot Only  
AIC-78xx BIOS automatically controls the  
removable disks.  
Disks under Int 13  
as Fixed Disks  
All Disks  
[Disabled]  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
BIOS Support for  
Bootable CD-ROM  
Select "Enabled".  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-43  
SCSI Disk Utilities  
This utility scans the SCSI bus for SCSI devices, reports a description of each device. Run these  
utilities before configuring SCSI devices.  
To enter the utility, select "SCSI Disk Utilities" on the Options menu.  
The SCSI ID scan begins displaying the message as shown below.  
AIC-7902 A slot 00, 01:04:00  
Scanning SCSI ID : 0 LUN Number : 0  
When the SCSI ID scan completes, the screen listing SCSI IDs and associated devices appears.  
Select SCSI Disk and press <Enter>  
SCSI ID #0  
SCSI ID #1  
SCSI ID #2  
SCSI ID #3  
SCSI ID #4  
SCSI ID #5  
SCSI ID #6  
SCSI ID #7  
SCSI ID #8  
SCSI ID #9  
SCSI ID #10  
SCSI ID #11  
SCSI ID #12  
SCSI ID #13  
SCSI ID #14  
SCSI ID #15  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
No device  
No device  
No device  
No device  
No device  
No device  
ESG-SHV_SCA_HSBP_M15  
AIC-7902  
No device  
No device  
:
:
:
:
:
:
No device  
No device  
No device  
No device  
No device  
No device  
Find out the SCSI ID for the installed optional on this screen. You can also view the device  
information by selecting a device and pressing Enter.  
The following sub menu appears.  
SCSI ID#4 : xxxxxxxxx  
Firmware : xxxx xxx  
Capacity : xxGB  
Format Disk  
Verify Disk Media  
The following table lists submenu items and descriptions.  
Submenu item  
Format Disk  
Description  
Formats the selected device in the raw level.  
Verify Disk Media  
Verifies all the sectors in the selected device. If one  
or more bad sectors are found, reassigns the  
sectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-44 Configuring Your Server  
Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board  
To configure SCSI devices connected to an optional SCSI controller board, use the SCSI BIOS  
utility provided with the optional SCSI controller board.  
Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board for details.  
When the server has multiple SCSI controller boards installed, the server first displays the start-up  
message of the SCSISelect utility for the SCSI controller on the baseboard. It then displays the  
utility start-up message for additional SCSI controllers one by one. The start-up message appears  
for the SCSI controller board in the PCI #1 slot first, then PCI #2, On board, PCI #3, PCI #4, PCI #5,  
PCI #6, PCI #7, and finally PCI #8. The message displayed may vary depending on the optional  
SCSI controller board. Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-45  
CONFIGURING BASEBOARD JUMPERS  
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the  
server against access from unauthorized users. When you forget the passwords, however, you may  
want clear them. The following describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the  
following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.  
IMPORTANT: Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set  
configuration data.  
To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the baseboard of the server.  
The following describe the clearing procedure.  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other  
than described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an  
electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server.  
1. Record the current BIOS settings.  
2. Power off the server and unplug the power cord.  
3. Extend the server from the rack cabinet.  
4. Remove the rear access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).  
5. Remove the CPU access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).  
6. Change the desired jumper switch setting.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may cause  
the server to fail or malfunction.  
„
„
Use the clip over jumper pins (pins 1 and 2) on the baseboard.  
Do not lose the clip.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-46 Configuring Your Server  
The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.  
Use the clip over  
pins 1 and 2.  
JP4  
JP5  
JP6  
Pins for protecting/clearing  
the CMOS data.  
Pins for protecting/clearing  
the passwords.  
„ Pins for protecting/clearing the passwords  
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the passwords.  
Open these two pins to protect the passwords (factory-set).  
„ Pins for protecting/clearing the CMOS data  
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the CMOS data.  
Open these two pins to protect the CMOS data (factory-set).  
7. Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.  
8. Run BIOS setup utility to reconfigure the baseboard.  
9. Save and exit the utility.  
10. Restore the jumper switch setting and power on the server for reconfiguration.  
NOTE: Place the clip over the jumper pins 1 and 2 after use to keep  
the pin.  
Pins 1 and 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Installing the Operating System with Express  
Setup  
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following  
operating systems to the server.  
„ Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
„ Microsoft Windows 2000  
To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section, contact your service  
representative.  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the  
system date and time by using the BIOS set up utility "SETUP." See  
Chapter 4 for detail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
About Express Setup  
"Express Setup" contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM is intended for initial setup  
of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by  
detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and  
configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the  
disk, and installs the desired operating system.  
IMPORTANT: Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the  
server system. Therefore, it clears the contents of the hard disk.  
For Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000, Express Setup automatically configures your  
server and installs the operating system. After a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be  
done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM,  
input a product ID number, and acknowledge the license agreement.  
For the other operating systems, Express Setup initializes the target disk(s), creates the maintenance  
partition, and installs the various maintenance utilities from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-  
ROM to lead your server to ready-to-install for the desired operating system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-3  
Express Setup uses "Configuration Diskette". The Configuration Diskette is a floppy disk that  
includes the configuration information for the server setup used in the automatic installation mode.  
Express Setup will perform all the process of the setup using the information in the floppy disk.  
During this procedure, you do not have to be in front of the Express server to confirm the state of  
the setup. Also, using the same Configuration Diskette used before allows you to re-setup your  
server with the same condition as before.  
Express Setup includes two types of installation method.  
„ Quick start  
Quick start uses the Configuration Diskette that the configuration parameters for server  
setup are pre-loaded before starting the Express Setup. The configuration parameters are  
loaded by using the Configuration Diskette Creator (see Chapter 6).  
„ Normal start  
Normal start is to create the Configuration Diskette after starting the Express Setup.  
NOTES:  
„
Use the blank disk in the accessory box to create Configuration  
Diskette.  
„
You can create Configuration Diskette in advance using  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" included in  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„
If you create Configuration Diskette in advance, you can  
abbreviate the items that is necessary to input or select during  
Express Setup. (You can also create or modify the setup  
information restored in Configuration Diskette during Express  
Setup.) If you have a computer other than NEC Express servers  
that is running with Windows 95/98, Windows NT 3.51 or later, or  
Windows 2000/Windows Server 2003, we recommend you to edit  
setup information from the computer in advance using  
Configuration Diskette Creator.  
For more information on how to create Configuration Diskette using  
Configuration Diskette Creator, see Chapter 6.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 in the server.  
Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation.  
NOTE: If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express  
Setup, see Appendix D.  
Installation Notice  
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation  
in order to install Windows Server 2003 correctly.  
Supported OS on this model  
The server supports the following edition:  
„ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition  
(Described as "Windows Server 2003" from now on.)  
„ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition  
(Described as "Windows Server 2003" from now on.)  
On installing other OS, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.  
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver  
To install optional mass storage driver, see "Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file.  
BIOS Specification  
Before installing Windows Server 2003, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct.  
See Chapter 4 to specify them.  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
On Windows Server 2003 systems, the ESMPRO Agent needs the necras.sys driver. To install the  
necras.sys, run the System update from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-5  
Windows Server 2003  
Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system. However, note the following  
issue:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding  
the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe  
(BIOS and optional board specification)  
The document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached  
to the other software package which is sold separately from NEC,  
but refer to this document when you install Windows Server 2003  
on this model.  
„
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems"  
described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as  
"Specifying Memory Dump".  
Installing on the Mirrored Volume  
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk  
Management", invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk,  
and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed.  
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer  
Management".  
Connecting MO Device  
If you operate installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected, the installation may not  
be completed normally. In such case, detach MO device and then re-install the system from the  
beginning.  
Media such as DAT  
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,  
such as DAT.  
Connecting Hard Disk  
Connect the hard disk that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Creating Partition Size  
The minimum size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the  
following formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 2900MB  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Installed Memory Size × 1.5  
Dump file Size  
= Installed Memory Size + 12MB  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug  
information (memory dump). If you set the default value of  
paging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, the accurate  
debug information (memory dump) may not be collected.  
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is  
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify  
4095MB for the paging file size.  
„
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory  
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the minimally required partition size will be  
calculated by the above formula as follows:  
2900MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) = 4192MB.  
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk  
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to  
Dynamic Disk kept remained.  
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix D to re-install the system.  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")  
In disk area, an area displayed as "MAINTE_P" may exist. This area is maintenance partition for  
saving configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-7  
The Flow of Setup  
This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.  
: Process that continues automatically  
: Process that need to input or select  
Read notes and restrictions.  
Go back  
No  
Confirmed  
Select how to install  
Yes  
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.  
Confirmed  
Select Setup Parameter File.  
Terminate  
Retrieve  
again  
New File  
Select OS  
Existing File  
Check Setup Parameter File  
If you need to  
reset the  
specification  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Confirm the  
setting/select whether  
or not to modify  
Yes  
No  
Confirm the specification and input the value.  
OK  
Re-select  
Disk Array Configuration *1  
↓
Restart  
↓
Insert Windows CD-ROM  
Creating Maintenance Partition  
↓
Restart  
↓
Installing Utilities  
Agree Software License Agreement  
↓
Restart  
↓ *2  
Creating OS Partition  
↓
Express Setup  
↓
Log on Automatically  
Restart  
↓
Formatting OS Partition  
↓
Copying NEC Modules  
↓
After restarting the  
computer, the installation  
completed.  
Copying Selected Application Modules  
*1 The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is  
specified.  
*2 If you select [Others], the process is completed here.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-8 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Installing the Windows Server 2003  
This section describes on how to setup the system using Express Setup.  
Prepare Configuration Diskette. You can operate the installation if you do not have Configuration  
Diskette specified in advance, but one floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44MB is necessary also  
in such case. For Configuration Diskette, use the blank disk in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
package or prepare other floppy disk personally.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If you modified the system configuration, execute "System  
Update".  
„
If you want to modify or add Graphics Accelerator Driver or the  
drivers of Network Adapter and so on, see Appendix D.  
1. Turn the power of peripheral device on, and then turn on the server.  
2. Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Click [Express Setup].  
"Note" will be displayed.  
6. Read the instruction carefully and click [OK].  
The message "Insert Configuration Diskette" appears.  
7. Insert "Configuration Diskette" into floppy disk drive and click [OK].  
NOTE: If you do not have "Configuration Diskette", insert a blank  
floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click  
[OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-9  
[Using the specified Configuration Diskette]  
The Setup File included in "Configuration Diskette" will be displayed.  
1) Select the Setup File name to use during the installation.  
NOTE: If there is any problem that can not be modified in the Setup  
File you selected, the message to set another "Configuration Diskette"  
appears. In such case, confirm the floppy disk you inserted.  
After the Setup File is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify the  
Setup File parameters?" is displayed.  
2) If you want to edit the information file, click [Review]. If you do not want to edit  
the information file and continue the installation, click [Skip].  
Click [Review] → Go to step 8.  
Click [Skip] → Go to step 9.  
[Using Blank disk]  
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.  
The input box appears.  
2) Input the file name.  
[Operating System to Install] appears.  
The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list.  
3) Select [Windows Server 2003] you want to install from the list box.  
8. Confirm the contents specified during OS installation.  
If Disk Array Controller Board is connected to Express server mainframe, the [Configure  
RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and then click  
[Next].  
Next, [Basic Information] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if  
necessary, and then click [Next]. ("Supported Computer" shown in the screen differs  
according to the model.)  
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen to continue. Modify the  
specification each time if necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally  
required size.  
„
If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID  
Configuration", the information included in the first partition  
(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted and deleted.  
The information included in the other partition will be retained.  
In the figure below, describes the partition which information will  
be deleted when maintenance partition exists.  
First Partition  
<Maintenance Partition>  
Retained  
Second  
Partition  
Deleted  
Third  
Partition  
Retained Retained  
Fourth  
Partition  
„
„
You can not re-install the system with the existing partition that is  
upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use  
Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".  
If "Create New Partition" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration"  
is selected, do not specify the value for the partition more than  
120GB.  
„
„
If you specify other than 4095MB for the "Installing Partition", it  
is necessary to convert to NTFS.  
If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is  
selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows  
Server 2003 does not exist (excluding maintenance partition),  
Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk to  
install Windows Server 2003.  
„
„
You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.  
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the  
specified contents of the former screen and require to go back to  
modify the specification.  
„
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows  
Server 2003 is to be installed appears. The first 55MB area  
displayed on the screen is a partition that is used to store the  
configuration information or utilities unique of the server. We do  
not recommend to delete this area, but if you do not want to  
reserve this 55MB area, perform the installation by manual setup.  
It is unable to delete this area by Express Setup.  
„
If you specify other than 120GB for the actual area, you may not  
create the partition specified as the entire area in sizes more than  
120GB.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-11  
NOTES:  
„
If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen will  
go back to select the Setup File. [Cancel] exists only in [Basic  
Information] screen.  
„
If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup  
automatically selects default value for the later specification to  
continue the installation.  
When all the specification has completed, the system reboots automatically.  
9. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.  
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to  
mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the  
installation.  
10. Follow the message and take NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and Configuration  
Diskette out of the CD-ROM drive and floppy disk drive, and insert Windows Server  
2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
[Software License Agreement] screen appears.  
11. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not  
agree, click [I disagree] or press F3.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and  
Windows Server 2003 will not be installed.  
„
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install,  
the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and  
Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specify the  
appropriate value.  
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers  
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory.  
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC11\PROSet\WS03XP32  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-13  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed  
and Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click  
[Local Area Connection].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.  
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
3. Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the  
value specified for HUB.  
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Specify the other network driver with the same progress above.  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be  
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding  
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet)  
that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives.  
This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For  
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving  
Problems" described later in this chapter.  
Optional Network Board Driver (N8104-80/86/103/111/113)  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board, the network driver will be installed automatically.  
Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be used.  
IMPORTANT: If you want to utilize optional Network Board  
"N8104-103", open the [Advanced] in PROSet window and change  
the [Offload TCP Segmentation] value to "Off".  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools]  
→ [Computer Management].  
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy  
disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller](When N8103-65F board is installed.)  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI](When N8103-75 board is installed.)  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-15  
Setting for Solving Problems  
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely  
and as soon as possible when it should occur.  
Memory Dump (Debug Information)  
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the  
server.  
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump  
„
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of  
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the  
memory dump.  
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the  
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory  
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you re-start the  
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to specify.  
1. Select [Control Panel] and click [System].  
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.  
2. Select [Advanced] tab.  
3. Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug  
information is recommended. If the mounted memory size is larger  
than 2GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that  
specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.  
„
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of  
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB".  
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added  
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel  
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging  
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to  
adding memory.  
Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information  
(memory dump) write destination drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-16 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
4. Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the  
[Write debugging information] group box.  
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".  
D:\MEMORY.DMP  
5. Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.  
The [Performance Options] window appears.  
6. Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.  
7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.  
8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value larger than  
[Recommended], and click [Set].  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Be sure to create memory dump with the size described above on  
the OS partition. If [Default Size] of the paging file is specified  
to the value smaller than "Recommended" value, the correct debug  
information (memory dump) may not be collected.  
„
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition  
Size to be Created" described earlier.  
To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, we  
recommend you to press dump switch to confirm that the dump  
will be collected normally in advance.  
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit  
the new memory size.  
9. Click [OK].  
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification.  
In such case, follow the message to restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-17  
Windows Dr. Watson  
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected,  
Dr. Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure  
below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.  
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.  
2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].  
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.  
3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.  
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".  
NOTE: You can not specify network pass. Specify the pass on local  
computer.  
4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.  
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with  
Windows Debugger.  
5. Check the following check box on the [Option] box.  
† Dump Symbol Table  
† Dump All Thread Contexts  
† Add To Existing Log File  
† Create Crash Dump File  
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.  
6. Click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-18 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Network Monitor  
Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. To utilize  
Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so we  
recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.  
1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].  
The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].  
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.  
4. Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the component ON and click  
[Next].  
5. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into CD-ROM  
drive and click [OK].  
6. Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.  
7. Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.  
8. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.  
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network  
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.  
Installing Maintenance Utilities  
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See  
Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-19  
Updating the System  
Update the system in the situation below:  
„ CPU is expanded (expanded to single processor to multi-processor).  
„ Modified system configuration.  
„ Recovered the system using recovery process.  
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and  
insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update  
the System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the  
setup process.  
Making Backup Copies of System Information  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the  
server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information by the following process.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot the  
system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-20 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Exceptional Setup  
This section explains how to setup by the exceptional way. You usually do not have to do as follows.  
The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device.  
Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup  
If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to  
be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.  
1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.  
2. If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID system before  
running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
3. Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
4. (a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check "Use Existing Array".  
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".  
5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.  
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.  
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to messages displayed on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-21  
Microsoft Windows 2000  
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® 2000 in the server.  
Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation.  
NOTE: If you install Windows 2000 without using Express Setup, see  
Appendix D.  
Installation Notice  
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation  
in order to install Windows 2000 correctly.  
Supported OS on this model  
The server supports the following edition:  
„ Microsoft Windows 2000 Server version (Described as "Windows 2000" from now on.)  
„ Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server version (Described as "Windows 2000" from  
now on.)  
On installing other OS, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.  
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver  
To install optional mass storage driver, see "Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file.  
BIOS Specification  
Before installing Windows 2000, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct. On  
BIOS specification, there are some items to specify for the new functions provided from Windows  
2000 (Plug and Play, support for USB interface and so on). See Chapter 4 to specify them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-22 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Windows 2000  
Express Setup can install Windows 2000 operating system. However, note the following issue:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding  
the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe  
(BIOS and optional board specification)  
The document for installing Windows 2000 is also attached to the  
other software package which is sold separately from NEC, but  
refer to this document when you install Windows 2000 on this  
model.  
„
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems"  
described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as  
"Specifying Memory Dump".  
Installing on the Mirrored Volume  
If you want to install Windows 2000 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk Management",  
invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk, and valid the  
mirroring again after the installation has completed.  
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer  
Management".  
Connecting MO Device  
If you operate installing Windows 2000 with MO device connected, the installation may not be  
completed normally. In such case, detach MO device and then re-install the system from the  
beginning.  
Media such as DAT  
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,  
such as DAT.  
Connecting Hard Disk  
Connect the hard disk that OS is not going to be installed after installing the OS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-23  
Creating Partition Size  
The minimum size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the  
following formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 1000MB  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Installed Memory Size * 1.5  
Dump file Size  
= Installed Memory Size + 12MB  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug  
information (memory dump). If you set the default value of  
paging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, the accurate  
debug information (memory dump) may not be collected.  
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is  
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify  
4095MB for the paging file size.  
„
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory  
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the minimally required partition size will be  
calculated by the above formula as follows:  
1000MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) = 2292MB  
NOTES:  
If you want to install using Express Setup, calculate the minimally  
required partition size as follows:  
„
„
If you do not apply Windows 2000 Service Pack  
The larger value of either one: 'Minimum Partition Size' described  
above, or '4095MB'.  
If you want to apply Windows 2000 Service Pack  
The larger value of either one: 'Minimum Partition Size' described  
above + 850MB or '4095MB'.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-24 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk  
You cannot re-install Windows 2000 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to  
Dynamic Disk kept remained.  
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix D to re-install the system.  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")  
In disk area, an area displayed as "MAINTE_P" may exist. This area is maintenance partition for  
saving configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-25  
The Flow of Setup  
This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.  
: Process that continues automatically  
: Process that need to input or select  
Read notes and restrictions.  
Go back  
No  
Confirmed  
Select how to install  
Yes  
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.  
Confirmed  
Select Setup Parameter File.  
Terminate  
Retrieve  
again  
New File  
Select OS  
Existing File  
Check Setup Parameter File  
If you need to  
reset the  
specification  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Confirm the  
setting/select whether  
or not to modify  
Yes  
No  
Confirm the specification and input the value.  
OK  
Re-select  
Disk Array Configuration *1  
Insert Windows CD-ROM  
↓
Restart  
↓
Creating Maintenance Partition  
Agree Software License Agreement  
Insert SP CD-ROM  
↓
Restart  
↓
Installing Utilities  
↓
Restart  
↓ *2  
Creating OS Partition  
↓
Express Setup  
↓
Log on Automatically  
Restart  
↓
Formatting OS Partition  
↓
Copying NEC Modules  
↓
After restarting the  
computer, the installation  
completed.  
Copying Selected Application Modules  
*1 The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is  
specified.  
*2 If you select [Others], the process is completed here.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-26 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Installing the Windows 2000  
This section describes on how to setup the system using Express Setup.  
Prepare Configuration Diskette. You can operate the installation if you do not have Configuration  
Diskette specified in advance, but one floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44MB is necessary also  
in such case. For Configuration Diskette, use the blank disk in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
package or prepare other floppy disk personally.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If you modified the system configuration, execute "System  
Update".  
„
If you want to modify or add Graphics Accelerator Driver or the  
drivers of Network Adapter and so on, see Appendix D.  
1. Turn the power of peripheral device on, and then turn on the server.  
2. Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the  
server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Click [Express Setup].  
"Note" will be displayed.  
6. Read the instruction carefully and click [OK].  
The message "Insert Configuration Diskette" appears.  
7. Insert "Configuration Diskette" into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].  
NOTE: If you do not have "Configuration Diskette", insert a blank  
floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click  
[OK]. Make sure not to remove the "Configuration Diskette" from the  
floppy disk drive until the message that allow you to remove it  
appeared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-27  
[Using the specified Configuration Diskette]  
The Setup File included in "Configuration Diskette" will be displayed.  
4) Select the Setup File name to use during the installation.  
NOTE: If there is any problem that can not be modified in the Setup  
File you selected, the message to set another "Configuration Diskette"  
appears. In such case, confirm the floppy disk you inserted.  
After the Setup File is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify the  
Setup File parameters?" is displayed.  
5) If you want to edit the information file, click [Yes]. If you do not want to edit the  
information file and continue the installation, click [Skip].  
Click [Yes] → Go to step 8.  
Click [Skip] → Go to step 9.  
[Using Blank disk]  
6) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.  
The input box appears.  
7) Input the file name.  
[Operating System to Install] appears.  
The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list.  
8) Select [Windows 2000] you want to install from the list box.  
8. Confirm the contents specified during OS installation.  
If Disk Array Controller Board is connected to Express server mainframe, the [Configure  
RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and then click  
[Next].  
Next, [Basic Information] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if  
necessary, and then click [Next]. ("Supported Computer" shown in the screen differs  
according to the model.)  
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen to continue. Modify the  
specification each time if necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-28 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally  
required size.  
„
If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID  
Configuration", the information included in the first partition  
(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted and deleted.  
The information included in the other partition will be retained.  
In the figure below, describes the partition which information will  
be deleted when maintenance partition exists.  
First Partition  
<Maintenance Partition>  
Retained  
Second  
Partition  
Deleted  
Third  
Partition  
Retained Retained  
Fourth  
Partition  
„
„
You can not re-install the system with the existing partition that is  
upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use  
Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".  
If "Create New Partition" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration"  
is selected, do not specify the value for the partition more than the  
actual area size.  
„
„
If you specify other than 4095MB for the "Installing Partition", it  
is necessary to convert to NTFS.  
If you specify other than 120GB for the actual area, you may not  
create the partition specified as the entire area in sizes more than  
120GB.  
„
If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is  
selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows  
2000 does not exist (excluding maintenance partition), Express  
Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk to install  
Windows 2000.  
„
„
You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.  
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the  
specified contents of the former screen and require to go back to  
modify the specification.  
„
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows  
2000 is to be installed appears. The first 55MB area displayed on  
the screen is a partition that is used to store the configuration  
information or utilities unique of the server. We do not recommend  
to delete this area, but if you do not want to reserve this 55MB  
area, perform the installation by manual setup. It is unable to  
delete this area by Express Setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-29  
NOTES:  
„
If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen will  
go back to select the Setup File. [Cancel] exists only in [Basic  
Information] screen.  
„
If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup  
automatically selects default value for the later specification to  
continue the installation.  
When all the specification has completed, the system reboots automatically.  
9. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.  
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to  
mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the  
installation.  
10. Follow the message and take NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and Configuration  
Diskette out of CD-ROM drive, and floppy disk drive, and insert Windows 2000 CD-  
ROM into CD-ROM drive.  
[Software License Agreement] screen appears.  
11. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not  
agree, click [I disagree] or press F3.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and  
Windows 2000 will not be installed.  
„
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install,  
the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and  
Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specify the  
appropriate value.  
12. If you selected [Apply] on [Apply Service Pack] at Basic Information, follow the  
procedure below.  
1) Follow the message to take Windows 2000 CD-ROM out of CD-ROM drive.  
2) Follow the message to insert Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 or later into CD-ROM  
drive.  
Windows 2000 and the specified application will be installed automatically and logon to  
the system. Install and configure the device drivers.  
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-30 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers  
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory.  
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PROSet\WIN2K  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-31  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed  
and Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
3. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
4. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
5. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.  
Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.  
3. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
4. Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the  
value specified for HUB.  
5. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Specify the other network driver with the same progress above.  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding  
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet)  
that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives.  
This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For  
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setup for Trouble  
Process" later in this document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-32 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Optional Network Board Driver  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-80/86/103/111/113), confirm the versions of  
driver in EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the version of driver attached to the Network board.  
CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PRO1000\WIN2K\e1000nt5.sys  
CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PRO100\WIN2K\e100bnt5.sys  
If the driver attached to the Network board is old, install the driver stored in NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
Refer to the re-installation procedure described (Appendix E).  
Network Driver for (N8104-103/113)  
[CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PRO1000\WIN2K]  
Network Driver for (N8104-80/86/111)  
[CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PRO100\WIN2K]  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically. The  
following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually.  
If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to  
the board to install the driver.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "Setup.exe" in the following directory.  
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\VIDEO\setup.exe.  
4. Follow the message to continue the installation.  
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to  
continue.  
5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, follow the  
direction on the screen and restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-33  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools]  
→ [Computer Management].  
2. Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk  
drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller](When N8103-65F board is installed.)  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI](When N8103-75 board is installed.)  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-34 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Setting for Solving Problems  
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely  
and as soon as possible when it should occur.  
Memory Dump (Debug Information)  
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the  
server.  
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump  
„
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of  
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the  
memory dump.  
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the  
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory  
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you re-start the  
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to specify.  
1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [System].  
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Advanced].  
4. Click [Startup and Recovery].  
5. Enter the location to write the debug information to the text box.  
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive with the file name "MEMORY.DMP".  
D:\MEMORY.DMP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-35  
IMPORTANT:  
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug  
information is recommended.  
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete  
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel  
Memory Dump" instead.  
„
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of  
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB".  
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added  
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel  
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging  
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to  
adding memory.  
Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information  
(memory dump) write destination drive.  
6. Click [Performance Options].  
7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual Memory] dialog box.  
8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging File Size for Selected Drive] box to the value larger  
than [Recommended Size], and click [Specify].  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Be sure to create memory dump with the size described above on  
the OS partition. If [Default Size] of the paging file is specified  
to the value smaller than "Recommended" value, the correct debug  
information (memory dump) may not be collected.  
„
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition  
Size to be Created" described earlier.  
To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, we  
recommend you to press dump switch to confirm that the dump  
will be collected normally in advance.  
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit  
the new memory size.  
9. Click [OK].  
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification.  
In such case, follow the message to restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-36 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Windows 2000 Dr. Watson  
Windows 2000 Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is  
detected,  
Dr. Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure  
below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.  
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.  
2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].  
The [Dr. Watson for Windows 2000] dialog box appears.  
3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.  
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".  
NOTE: You can not specify network pass. Specify the pass on local  
computer.  
4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.  
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with  
Windows Debugger.  
5. Check the following check box on the [Option] box.  
† Dump Symbol Table  
† Dump All Thread Contexts  
† Add To Existing Log File  
† Create Crash Dump File  
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.  
6. Click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-37  
Network Monitor  
Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. To utilize  
Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so we  
recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.  
1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].  
The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].  
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.  
4. Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the component ON and click  
[Next].  
5. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM  
drive and click [OK].  
6. Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.  
7. Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.  
8. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.  
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network  
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.  
Installing Maintenance Utilities  
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See  
Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-38 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack -  
Update the system in the situation below:  
„ CPU is expanded (expanded to single processor to multi-processor).  
„ Modified system configuration.  
„ Recovered the system using recovery process.  
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and  
insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update  
the System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the  
setup process and apply Service Pack.  
Making Backup Copies of System Information  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the  
server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information by the following process.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot the  
system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-39  
Exceptional Setup  
This section explains how to setup by the exceptional way. You usually do not have to do as follows.  
The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device.  
Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup  
If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to  
be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.  
1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.  
2. If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID system before  
running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
3. Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
4. (a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check "Use Existing Array".  
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".  
5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.  
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.  
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to messages displayed on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-40 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Installing and Using Utilities  
This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your  
server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of  
installing and configuring your server. Shipped with all NEC servers, the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM provides a flexible, guided installation process for system  
administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows 2000 Server or other  
operating systems (contact your service representative for the server certified operating systems).  
NOTE: Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup,  
complete the hardware configuration.  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes three distinct programs. Two can be booted under DOS for  
initial setup, and one is for use under Windows operating system.  
„ DOS-based with local console  
Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose the  
server and to install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the  
system drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-3  
„ DOS-based with remote console  
Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server over  
the network or via COM B (serial) port.  
NOTE: No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run this  
program.  
„ Windows-based  
This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the Microsoft  
Windows system (Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can install  
the several applications and read the documentation from the menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with  
local console.  
Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The following procedure instructs you to start NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-  
ROM while NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is running.  
1. Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into the CD-  
ROM drive of your server.  
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-5  
Express Setup  
"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides  
the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen  
prompts for software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers,  
applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operating system.  
If you install Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000 , after a few tasks are completed, all that  
remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and install the Windows  
CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge the license agreement.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server  
system and, therefore, the Express Setup clears the contents of the  
hard disk.  
When the setup is started, do not turn off the server until the setup  
is completed, and also make sure not to remove the "Configuration  
Diskette" from the floppy disk drive until the message that allow  
you to remove it appeared.  
Tools  
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It provides more installation options than  
Express Setup and permits the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility, set up a maintenance partition, and update the  
various BIOS programs.  
NEC Express5800 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ver3. xxxx-x Copyright (C) NEC Corporation 2003  
Tools Menu  
RAID Board: Present  
Total Drives: 1  
Drives in Group: 1  
Hot Spares: 1  
RAID Level: 7  
Write Mode: WRITE_THRU  
Maint Part: Present  
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
System Diagnostics  
Create Support Disk  
Setup Maintenance Partition  
BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
System Management  
Help  
Return to the Top Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6 Installing and Using Utilities  
„ Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data  
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or  
restored from the floppy disk.  
– Save Disk Array Configuration Data  
The configuration information on the disk array controller is saved into the  
floppydisk. If you set or change RAID, always use this function to save the  
configuration information into a floppy disk.  
– Restore Disk Array Configuration Data  
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and  
hard disk on the disk array controller.  
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the  
configuration information.  
When the defected disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information on  
the hard disk must be saved into the disk array controller.  
However, if the configuration information on the new disk array controller is saved  
into a hard disk, use this function to restore the configuration information.  
IMPORTANT: Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this  
function. In that case, this menu will not be shown.  
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility  
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program that performs  
preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 8 or online help  
for details.  
„ System Diagnostics  
Executes various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and  
if the connection between the server and additional board is normal.  
After the System Diagnostics is executed, a system check program assigned to each model  
starts. See Chapter 7 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-7  
„ Create Support Disk  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities  
that you can put on floppy disks and load onto your system.  
Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM. If your system has the Windows operating system, you may find it more  
convenient to use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-based to make support disks  
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management in the  
future. Customers are to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.  
– Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and  
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition. (No need to create this disk when  
installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)  
– Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000  
Advanced Server. (This disk is utilized for Windows 2000 clean installation and for  
Recovery for Windows 2000 system.) (No need to create this disk when installing  
the operating system with the Express Setup.)  
– ROM-DOS Startup FD  
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.  
– Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD  
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
– System Management FD  
Creates a support disk for activating the System Management.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8 Installing and Using Utilities  
„ Setup Maintenance Partition  
Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk.  
About 55MB of the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and  
executable commands.  
In this menu, you can create the maintenance partition, install the various utilities, and  
update the utilities. The maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are  
system diagnostics, System Management, and Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu. If  
the processing is discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.  
„
The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from  
the operating system. In order to retain the Configuration Data,  
do not delete the partition.  
NOTES:  
„
The maintenance partition, once created, will not be recreated  
again.  
„
When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu items  
do not appear.  
– Create Maintenance Partition  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55MB of the maintenance partition on the  
system disk (or disk array system) as work area. The various utilities are installed  
when the maintenance partition is created successfully or when the maintenance  
partition is already created.  
– Install Maintenance Partition Utilities  
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.  
– Maintenance Partition Update  
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk. This  
menu is only used when the update disk is supplied from your service representative  
or attached with your system.  
– FDISK  
Execute FDISK command of ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete partitions,  
etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-9  
„ BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the  
server by using the update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from NEC  
customer service representative.  
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from the floppy  
disk, and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated.  
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program  
is running. If the update processing is discontinued, the system  
becomes unable to start.  
„ System Management  
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote control  
and alert.  
„ Help  
Displays explanations about various functions of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„ Return to the Top Menu  
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with  
remote console.  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator  
to set up the server from the management workstation (management PC) via the network or the  
server's COM2 (serial) port.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server, or  
on any other server obtained without the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER. Doing so may cause a failure of the server.  
When a keyboard is connected to the server, the remote console  
feature is disabled. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER determines that  
the server has a console. (Nothing is displayed on the management  
PC.)  
Starting  
The following two methods are available to start the server.  
„ Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN  
„ Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection  
(COM2)  
For the procedure for starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console,  
refer to Chapter 6 [MWA] – [Remote Management Configuration for the Server without console].  
IMPORTANT: Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu  
in BIOS SETUP. NEC EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the  
CD-ROM drive is not the first device to launch the system.  
To use this feature, you need 3.5-inch floppy disk. Please prepare the  
floppy disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-11  
NOTE: The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as  
shown below.  
„
„
LAN Controller 1 (10/100): [Enabled]  
Serial Port A:  
Base I/O address:  
Interrupt:  
[Enabled]  
[3F8]  
[IRQ 4]  
„
Serial Port B:  
Base I/O address:  
Interrupt:  
[Enabled]  
[2F8]  
[IRQ 3]  
„
„
„
„
Serial Port Address:  
Baud Rate:  
[On-board COM B]  
[19.2k]  
Flow Control:  
Console Type:  
[CTS/RTS]  
[PC ANSI]  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12 Installing and Using Utilities  
Shown below are the main menu items.  
„ Setup  
Automatically sets up the server.  
„ Tools  
Launch the features of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually.  
„ Help  
Help message on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„ Quit  
Quit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Setup  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server. The disk array  
and maintenance partition are automatically configured.  
Tools  
When you select the [Tools] on the Main Menu, the following screen appears.  
The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section "NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console" are displayed. See the previous  
subsection for detailed explanation of menu items.  
IMPORTANT: The followings are varied from the [Tools] menu in  
the local console mode.  
„
„
Test items and operation method of System Diagnostics. See  
Chapter 7 for details.  
Type of disks to be created in [Create Support Disk]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-13  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)  
The Master Control Menu is used to,  
„ Read documentation,  
„ Install the management software, and  
„ Install the viewer application (Adobe Acrobat Reader).  
NOTES:  
„
Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or later) or  
Windows NT 4.0 (or later).  
„
To read documentation (HTML and PDF files) in the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, the HTML browser (Microsoft  
Internet Explorer Version 5.0 (or later) or Netscape Communicator  
Version 4.0 (or later)), and Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.05 (or  
later) must be required in your system.  
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu appears on the screen automatically. If the CD-ROM Autorun function is  
invalid in your system, run the \MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly.  
Some items are grayed out when the logon user does not have the authority of the administrator or  
the system is not proper for the installation of the applications.  
To use Master Control Menu,  
„ Click on [Online Document],[Setup] or [Quit], or  
„ Click the right mouse button on the Master Control Menu window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14 Installing and Using Utilities  
CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool to create [Configuration Diskette] that is used for  
configuring the server with the Express Setup (see Chapter 5 for details).  
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette  
Creator to operate the setup, you can setup from the installation of OS to several utilities  
automatically except for a few key input to confirm the specification. Also, you can install the  
system with the same specification as before when re-installing the system. We recommend you to  
create [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: You can install Windows 2000/Windows Server 2003 without  
[Configuration Diskette]. Also, you can modify/newly create  
[Configuration Diskette] during the setup with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Installing Configuration Diskette Creator  
This section describes about installing Configuration Diskette Creator on the computer that is  
running with Windows XP/2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 3.51, and Windows  
95/98/Me to create Configuration Diskette.  
NOTE: Configuration Diskette Creator works on PC-AT compatible  
computers.  
Windows XP/2000 / Windows Server 2003 / Windows NT 4.0 / Windows 95/98/Me  
Follow the procedure below to install Configuration Diskette Creator on the computer that is  
running with Windows XP/2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 95/98/Me.  
NOTE: The instructions displayed on the screen may differ according  
to the model you are using, but setup can be operated with the same  
procedure.  
1. Start the OS.  
2. Insert the attached NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu will appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-15  
3. Right-click on the screen or left-click [Software Setup]. The menu will appear.  
4. Click [Configuration Diskette Creator]. Setup Wizard will start.  
Follow the message to continue the installation.  
NOTE: It is not necessary to input [Serial Number] on [User  
Information] dialog box.  
After completing the Configuration Diskette Creator installation, proceed to [Creating  
Configuration Diskette].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-16 Installing and Using Utilities  
Creating Configuration Diskette  
This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for OS installation and  
creating [Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.  
NOTE: In the procedure below, the folder name that is specified when  
installing Trekking command is assumed as [Configuration Diskette  
Creator].  
1. Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.  
<On Windows XP/2000 / Windows Server 2003 / Windows 95/98/Me>  
From the Start pop-up menu, click [Program] → [Configuration Diskette Creator] and  
select [Trekking].  
2. Click [Create new information files] from the [File] menu.  
The [Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-17  
3. Specify each item and click on [OK].  
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Basic  
Information] dialog box.  
4. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on [Next].  
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.  
When completing the specification of setup information, the [Save Setup Information]  
dialog box will appear.  
5. Confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for  
Setup File in [File Name].  
6. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].  
Now [Configuration Diskette] has been created. [Configuration Diskette] is used when  
you install Windows 2000/Windows Server 2003. Put a label and keep it where it will  
not be lost.  
NOTE: For the information on the contents of each specifying item,  
refer to the Help.  
If you want to modify the information file that already exists, click [Modify information  
Files] on Configuration Diskette Creator window. Refer to the Help to modify the inf  
file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-18 Installing and Using Utilities  
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver  
To install optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by the Express Setup, follow the procedure  
below to create [Configuration Diskette].  
1. Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.  
2. From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].  
[Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.  
3. Specify each item and click on [OK].  
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Disk  
Environment] dialog box.  
4. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on [Next].  
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.  
5. When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for mass storage  
device].  
6. When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the  
[Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for the Setup File in  
[File Name].  
7. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-19  
NEC ESMPRO  
The NEC ESMPRO (referred to as ESMPRO hereafter) lets a system administrator manage remote  
servers across a network. ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations,  
failures, and performance. With log data collected by ESMPRO, a system administrator can track  
long-term and short-term performance, monitor server usage, create graphs to record trends, and  
check server failure rates. The administrator can use the information collected to create more  
efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage.  
Functions and Features  
The ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network.  
These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation, system extension, and  
transfer tasks. Some features of ESMPRO Manager include:  
„ Hardware and software server configuration  
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the CPU, memory, disks, disk arrays,  
and LAN boards.  
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each  
server.  
„ Server failures  
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type,  
location, cause, and suggested corrective action.  
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature,  
memory failure, crashes, and software failure information.  
„ Performance  
– ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and  
displays information, such as the rate of CPU load, memory usage, disk usage, and  
LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and  
prevent server overloads.  
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online  
document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-20 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC MWA  
NEC MWA is an application that enables the remote management of the server through a  
management PC over the network. (A management PC is a computer running NEC ESMPRO  
Manager.)  
Refer to "MWA First Step Guide" in the following directory of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-  
ROM for details of its functions and operation.  
CD-ROM drive: \mwa\doc\en\mwa_fsg.pdf  
NOTE: How to install MWA is described in online documents. See  
"MWA Installation Guide" for details.  
Servers to be Remotely Managed by MWA  
The server with RomPilot or BMC can be managed by MWA.  
This product has BMC (IPMI1.5).  
Precautions  
"MWA First Step Guide" is common to all the managed servers.  
The followings are notes and restrictions for this product.  
* The serial port B or LAN 1 port is used to communicate the Base Management Controller  
(BMC) in the server with the management PC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-21  
Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using BIOS SETUP utilities and DOS-based tool on  
the server with remote console in case that the server is not connected the console like as keyboad.  
The following two methods are available.  
„ Through the management PC via LAN  
„ Through the management PC with direct connection  
Through the management PC via LAN  
1. Click [Program] - [NEC MWA] - [MWA] from the start menu on the management PC  
installed NEC MWA.MWA will start and open [Remote Control Manager].  
2. Insert a formatted floppy disk of 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive of the management  
PC.  
3. Select [Configuration] from the [File] menu of [MWA Remote Control Manager] to  
display the [Configuration] dialog box.  
4. Select [New] to display the [Select a model] dialog box.  
5. Check [Write data to FD] and select the model name to display the Configuration dialog  
box for the server.  
6. Set and register the configuration information on the [Configuration for BMC] dialog box  
and then write the configuration information into the floppy disk with the following file  
name:  
<Configuration Information File name>  
CSL_LESS.cfg  
The setting items of the server are as follows:  
Computer Name (The managed server name. Arbitrary.)  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Primary Alert Receiver (IP address of management PC)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-22 Installing and Using Utilities  
7. Select the [Properties] command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right  
mouse button on the server name to display the [Properties] dialog box.  
8. If the [Properties] dialog box appears, provide the following setting:  
<[ID] page>  
Connection Type: LAN  
<[Alert Notifications] page>  
Remove the check of [Use Default Settings] and check the [RESET] of [Activate].  
9. Select the [Open Remote Console] command from the popup menu displayed by clicking  
the right mouse button on the server name to start the [MWA Remote Console].  
10. Select the [Action at Remote Console Connect] command from the popup menu displayed  
by clicking the right mouse button on the server window to display the [Action at  
RomPilot Connect] dialog box. Then select [Go MWA mode].  
11. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
Insert the floppy disk storing the configuration information file into the floppy disk drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-23  
12. Turn off the power of the server and then on again to restart the system. After a single  
reboot, MWA Remote Console displays the main menu of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and  
you can operate tools on the server through the management PC.  
NOTE: The main menu appears without rebooting it when the setting  
in the configuration information file is already established.  
13. When the main menu appears on the screen of the management PC, remove the floppy  
disk from the floppy disk drive.  
14. Select the [Properties] command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right  
mouse button on the server name to display the [Properties] dialog box.  
Execute [Connection Check] on the [ID] tab page.  
15. When you want to operate other tools, remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
from the CD-ROM drive and turn off and on the server from MWA Remote Control  
Manager to start other tools.  
Select [Power control] command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right  
mouse button on the server name. You can turn off/on the server.  
IMPORTANT: When the Operation with remote console is end,  
remove the check of [RESET] of [Activate] in thr [Properties] dialog  
box and reboot the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-24 Installing and Using Utilities  
Through the management PC with direct connection  
1. Click [Program] - [NEC MWA] - [MWA] from the start menu on the management PC  
installed NEC MWA.  
MWA will start and open [Remote Control Manager].  
2. Select [Environment] - [Direct Connection Setting] from the [File] menu of [MWA  
Remote Control Manager] to display the [Direct Connection] dialog box. Then provide  
the following setting:  
<Direct Connection>  
Port No.: COM port on the management PC to be connected  
Baud Rate: 19200  
Flow Control: RTS/CTS  
3. Select [Configuration] from the [File] menu of [MWA Remote Control Manager] to  
display the [Configuration] dialog box.  
4. Select [New] to display the [Select a model] dialog box.  
5. Check [Write data to FD]. Then select the model name to display the [Configuration for  
BMC] dialog box for the server.  
6. Set and register the configuration information including the computer name on the  
[Configuration for BMC] dialog box and then write the information into the floppy disk  
with the following file name:  
<Configuration Information File name>  
CSL_LESS.cfg  
7. Select the [Properties] command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right  
mouse button on the server name to display the [Properties] dialog box.  
8. If the [Properties] dialog box appears, provide the following setting:  
<[ID] page>  
Connection Type: COM  
COM: Direct (Cross cable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-25  
9. Select the [Open Remote Console] command from the popup menu displayed by clicking  
the right mouse button on the server name to start the [MWA Remote Console]. Then click  
on the [Connect] button on the MWA Remote Console.  
10. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
Insert the floppy disk storing the configuration information file into the floppy disk drive.  
11. Turn off the power of the server and then on again to restart the system.  
After a single reboot, MWA Remote Console displays the main menu of NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER and you can operate tools on the server through the management  
PC.  
NOTE: The main menu appears without rebooting it when the setting  
in the configuration information file is already established.  
12. When you want to operate other tools, remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
from the CD-ROM drive and Turn off and on the server to start other tools.  
IMPORTANT: When the Operation with remote console is end, click  
the [Disconnect] on MWA Remote Console.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-26 Installing and Using Utilities  
Power Console Plus  
Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system of the disk array controller (MegaRAID  
controller) produced by LSI Logic. Use of Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g., monitoring  
and maintenance) of RAID systems that are constructed on local NEC Express servers and NEC  
Express servers connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on  
graphical screens without the system being stopped.  
Major Functions  
Power Console Plus has the following features:  
„ Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration  
„ Enabling the change of RAID levels  
„ Being compatible with SAF-TE  
„ Supporting the performance monitor  
„ Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring, and  
fan monitoring  
„ Enabling the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive  
„ Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration  
„ Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-27  
Components  
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:  
„ SNMP Agent  
This function is not yet supported. Do not install SNMP Agent.  
„ MegaRAID Service Monitor  
Enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs.  
Install MegaRAID Service Monitor in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID  
controller is mounted.  
„ MegaRAID Client  
Controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the NEC  
Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that  
is connected through the NEC Express server and network.  
„ MegaRAID Server  
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID Server in  
the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted.  
„ MegaRAID Registration Server  
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install in one of NEC  
Express servers and management PCs that are connected through network. The above  
components must be installed correctly for establishing the environment to use Power  
Console Plus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-28 Installing and Using Utilities  
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and  
management PC.  
„ Server:  
NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted  
Install the following three components in this server:  
– MegaRAID Service Monitor  
– MegaRAID Server  
– MegaRAID Client  
„ Management PC:  
Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network (TCP/IP)  
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4.0  
Terminal Server Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC component.  
Management PC does not guarantee operation on Client, which used Terminal Server,  
Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.  
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after the Power On machine that installed  
"Server" and "Management Server".  
Install the following component in this PC:  
– MegaRAID Client  
„ Management server:  
Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs  
Install the following component in one of the servers or management PCs:  
– MegaRAID Registration Server  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-29  
Server Setup  
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID  
controller is mounted.  
Operating Environment  
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a  
server.  
„ Hardware  
– Machine:  
NEC Express5800 series connected with the MegaRAID controller array controller  
– Memory:  
Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more  
– Free space of the hard disk:  
5MB or more  
– Display unit:  
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger  
– Required peripheral equipment:  
Network Interface card  
CD-ROM unit  
Pointing device such as a mouse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-30 Installing and Using Utilities  
Management PC Setup  
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network  
(TCP/IP).  
Operating Environment  
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a  
management PC.  
„ Hardware  
– Machine:  
NEC Express5800 series  
PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a CPU at least  
equivalent to it)  
– Memory:  
Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more  
– Free space of the hard disk:  
5 MB or more  
– Display unit:  
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger  
– Required peripheral equipment:  
Network Interface card  
CD-ROM unit  
Pointing device such as a mouse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Maintenance  
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or  
storing the server.  
MAKING BACKUP COPIES  
It is recommended that you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the  
server on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools,  
consult with your service representative.  
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System  
Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup  
copy of the system information.  
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array  
configuration. When your hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is recommended to  
make a backup copy of the configuration data. To make a backup copy of the configuration data,  
use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on the optional disk array  
controller board. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2 Maintenance  
CLEANING  
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the serer in a good shape.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages  
1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
■ Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
■ Do not remove the lithium battery.  
■ Disconnect the power plug before cleaning with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ High temperature  
■ Make sure to complete board installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-3  
Cleaning the Server  
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the  
procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
To avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not use  
volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server.  
„
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of  
server, and the inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not  
moisten them with water.  
1. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
2. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
3. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.  
4. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and  
squeeze it firmly.  
5. Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.  
6. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, wipe the server with it once again.  
7. Wipe the server with a dry cloth.  
8. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4 Maintenance  
Cleaning the Interior  
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of  
the interior of the server, especially around the baseboard.  
Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a  
buildup can prevent proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server  
components. Also, dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials that can cause short circuits  
or corrosion of electrical contacts.  
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is  
located. For most office environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months.  
For more severe environments, clean the interior every 6 months.  
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover.  
You will need a small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection),  
computer grade canned air, and a small brush for cleaning the interior.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.  
WARNING  
Unplug all power cords.  
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is present  
inside the server and display unit even after the power is turned off. All voltage  
is removed only when the power cord is unplugged.  
1. Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.  
2. Remove the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)  
3. Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the baseboard.  
4. Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the baseboard.  
5. Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the  
interior of the server.  
6. Reinstall the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)  
7. Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-5  
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse  
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER lamp goes off),  
and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth.  
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep  
the mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the  
mouse regularly:  
1. Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and  
cotton swabs.  
2. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
3. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove  
it.  
4. Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and  
turn your hand holding the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward).  
The mouse ball is released onto your palm.  
Mouse ball  
Mouse ball cover  
Roller  
Bottom View  
5. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and  
squeeze it firmly.  
6. Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in  
Step 5.  
7. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.  
8. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe  
stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.  
9. Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.  
10. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.  
11. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6 Maintenance  
Cleaning CD-ROM  
A dusty CD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD-ROM regularly:  
1. Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit).  
2. Press the Eject button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.  
The tray comes out.  
3. Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.  
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your hand.  
4. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the CD-ROM drive. Doing  
so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.  
5. Press the Eject button or gently push on the tray front to close the tray.  
6. Wipe the signal side of the CD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Wipe CD-ROMs from the center to the outside. Use  
only CD-ROM cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM with record  
spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner causes damage to the CD-ROM  
contents. At worst, inserting the CD-ROM into the server may cause  
failure.  
NG  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-7  
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS  
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.  
Use the System Diagnostics program in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to  
diagnose the server.  
Test Items  
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.  
„ Memory  
„ CPU cache memory  
„ Hard disk used as a system  
IMPORTANT: When executing the System Diagnostics, make sure to  
remove the LAN cable. Executing the System Diagnostics with the  
LAN cable connected, the network may be influenced.  
NOTE: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8 Maintenance  
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics  
There are two ways to diagnose the server: to use the local console (keyboard) of the server itself,  
and to use the management PC via serial port (remote console).  
IMPORTANT: Two methods of LAN and the serial port are  
mentioned in Chapter 6 "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" in the way of  
communicating in remote console. Use the serial port to execute  
System Diagnostics with remote console. The LAN connection is not  
for System Diagnostics.  
Procedures to start the diagnostics program is as follows:  
1. Shutdown the OS, and turn off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.  
2. Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.  
3. Plug the power cord and turn on the server.  
4. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to reboot the server.  
See Chapter 6 "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for details.  
The following menu appears when started the server using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Local console  
Remote console  
5. Select [Tools].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-9  
6. Select [System Diagnostics].  
The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes.  
When the diagnosis completes, the test window title shows "Test End", as the following  
figure.  
Diagnosis tool title  
Test windows title  
TeDoLi(TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00(Build020901.1.1m)  
Test result  
Test End  
Start10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00  
Test End : NormalEnd  
03  
AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00  
<System>  
MEM  
CACHE  
<SCSI>  
Memory  
Cache  
16 count  
49 count  
NormalEnd  
NormalEnd  
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W  
89 count  
NormalEnd  
[Enter] Detail Information  
[ESC] Return to Enduser Menu  
Guide line  
Test window  
Diagnosis tool title: shows a name of this diagnosis and Version information.  
Test windows title: shows the progress of diagnosis. When it completes, it shows "Test  
End"  
Test Result:  
shows the information including time of start, end and progress, and  
result of the diagnosis.  
Guide line:  
shows a description of keys to navigate the window.  
Test window:  
Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis.  
If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics, the test result shows "Abnormal  
End" in red color. Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis which error  
occurred. Take a note of the error message showed, and contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-10 Maintenance  
7. Follow the Guide line showed in the bottom of the screen and press ESC to show the End  
user Menu showed below.  
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)  
Enduser Menu  
<Test Result>  
<Device List>  
<Log Info>  
<Option>  
<Reboot>  
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.  
<Test Result> shows the screen of the diagnosis completed aforementioned.  
<Device List> shows the information of all the devices connected.  
<Log Info>  
shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis. it can be  
saved to a floppy disk. To save the log information to a floppy disk,  
insert a formatted floppy disk to a floppy disk drive and select  
<Save[F]>.  
<Option>  
<Reboot>  
change where to output log  
Restarts the Express Server.  
8. Select <Reboot> in the End user Menu above.  
The Express Server restarts, and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boot the system.  
9. Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.  
10. Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.  
11. Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server.  
12. Plug the power code.  
This completes the System Diagnostics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-11  
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER  
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
■ Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
■ Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the  
server plugged to a power source.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
„
„
If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in the floor  
layout to a great extent, contact the service representative.  
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard  
disk, if any.  
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks to relocated the server  
if the contains any.  
It is recommended that the server and the internal devices should be  
stored in a place where the room temperature can be maintained. It  
is important for the server or internal devices to work normally after  
storage. Store the device in the place where temperature ranges  
between -10 to 55°C and humidity ranges between 20 to 80%,  
without dew condensation.  
„
If you use the server after transported or relocated, check the system  
timer and adjust it if necessary. If the system timer advances or  
delays remarkably with the passage of time, contact your service  
representative to repair it.  
The server or internal option device may be dewed if it is brought to  
a warm place from a cold place suddenly. Using a server or an  
internal device with dew attached may cause malfunction or failure.  
Make sure to adapt them to the operating environment before using  
them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-12 Maintenance  
1. Take a floppy disk and a CD-ROM out of the server, if any.  
2. Power off the server (the POWER lamp goes off).  
3. Disengage the power cord from the lock spring.  
4. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
5. Remove all the cables from the server.  
6. Remove the server from the rack cabinet.  
See Chapter 3 for details.  
7. Hold the server by its bottom with at least another person to carry the server.  
8. Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Troubleshooting  
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.  
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is  
recommended to install the Off-line Maintenance Utility, NEC  
ESMPRO, to the server and client computers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2 Troubleshooting  
SYSTEM VIEWERS  
Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.  
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language  
PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer  
of NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
[Example]  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-3  
LAMPS  
The following describes lamps on the server and their indications.  
POWER/SLEEP Lamp  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered.  
When the server is off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep  
mode). If the OS supports the power-saving mode such as Windows 2000, pressing the SLEEP  
switch blinks the POWER/SLEEP lamp in green and place the server in the power-saving mode.  
Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP lamp and place the server back in the  
normal mode.  
The power-saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power-saving feature. Some  
OS's allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is  
made to the server for a certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4 Troubleshooting  
STATUS Lamp  
The STATUS lamp stays lit in green when the server is in successful operation. When the  
STATUS lamp is unlit or lit/flashing in amber, it indicates that the server has failed.  
The following table lists indications of the STATUS lamp, descriptions, and actions to take.  
NOTES:  
„
„
If the server has the NEC ESMPRO or Off-line Maintenance Utility  
installed, you can view the error log to identify the cause of a  
trouble.  
To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from the OS and  
reboot it, if available. If the shutdown from the OS is not available,  
reset or execute the forced shut down or disconnect and connect the  
power cord to reboot the server.  
STATUS lamp  
STATUS lamp  
indication  
Description  
Action  
Lit in green  
The server is in successful  
operation.  
None  
Flashing in  
green  
Use the BIOS setup utility, SETUP, to  
identify the degraded device and  
replace it as soon as possible.  
• The server is in operation with  
its memory or CPU degraded.  
• A single-bit error occurred  
frequently.  
Unlit  
The server is off-powered.  
POST is in progress.  
Power on the server.  
Wait for a while. The STATUS lamp will  
light in a few seconds after POST  
completion.  
A CPU error occurred.  
Cycle power to the server. If POST  
displays an error message, take a note  
on the message and contact your  
service representative.  
A CPU thermal error was  
detected. (Thermal-Trip)  
A watchdog timer has timed out.  
An uncorrectable memory error  
was detected.  
A PCI system error occurred.  
A PCI parity error occurred.  
A CPU bus error occurred.  
Memory dumping is requested.  
Wait until memory dumping completes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-5  
STATUS lamp  
indication  
Description  
Action  
Lit in amber  
A thermal error (critical) was  
detected.  
Check internal fans for dust or debris.  
Also make sure that the internal fan  
cables are firmly connected.  
If this error indication persists, contact  
your service representative.  
A power supply(ies) was failed to Contact your service representative.  
operate.  
A voltage error (critical) was  
detected.  
Contact your service representative.  
Flashing in  
amber  
A power alarm was detected in  
each power system.  
A fan alarm was detected.  
Identify the failed power supply unit and  
contact your service representative.  
Make sure that the internal fan cables  
are firmly connected.  
If this error indication persists, contact  
your service representative.  
A thermal error (warning) was  
detected.  
Check internal fans for dust or debris.  
Also make sure that the internal fan  
cables are firmly connected.  
If this error indication persists, contact  
your service representative.  
A voltage error (warning) was  
detected.  
Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6 Troubleshooting  
DISK ACCESS Lamp  
The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3.5-inch disk bay.  
This lamp lights in green every time any of such hard disks is accessed.  
When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit in amber, it indicates that a hard disk error occurred. To  
identify a failed hard disk, see the lamps provided for each hard disk.  
DISK ACCESS lamp  
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp  
The LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS lamp is lit green when the server is connected to LAN. The lamp  
blinks while the server is accessed through the LAN (for packet transmission). The value next to  
the icon indicates the number of the network port on the rear panel.  
LAN2 ACCESS lamp  
LAN1 ACCESS lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-7  
UID Lamp  
Pressing the UID switch turns the UID lamp located on the front and rear of the server on and off.  
The UID lamp is visible through the rear of the chassis and allows you to locate the server you're  
working on from the rear of the servers on a rack.  
UID lamp  
UID switch  
UID lamp  
Access Lamps  
The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive light when access is made to a  
media in the drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8 Troubleshooting  
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp)  
The disk lamp on the 3.5-inch disk bay has different meanings depending on the display status.  
DISK lamps  
„ Lighting green  
The hard disk is installed and powered on.  
„ Blinking green  
Indicates that the hard disk is accessed.  
„ Lighting amber  
Indicates that the installed hard disk is defected in the disk array configuration.  
NOTE: While hard disks are in the disk array configuration  
(RAID1/RAID5 or RAID0+1), a single failed hard disk does not affect  
the operation of the server. However, it is recommended to replace the  
failed hard disk and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the hard disks as soon as  
possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed hard disk.)  
„ Alternate lighting green or amber  
Indicates that the hard disk is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If the defected  
hard disk is replaced with a new one in the disk array configuration, the data is  
automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function). During the rebuild operation, the lamp is lit  
green or amber alternatively.  
The lamp goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally. The lamp goes on amber if  
the rebuild fails.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-9  
IMPORTANT: To abort rebuilding, power off the server. In such a  
case, restart the server, hot-swap the failed hard disk, and restart  
rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the auto-rebuild  
feature.  
„
„
„
Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off before  
rebuilding hard disks, the auto-rebuild feature will not start.)  
When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 90 seconds before  
installing the hard disk back again.  
Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress.  
AC Standby Lamp  
The power supply bay on the front of the server has the AC standby lamp.  
„ Default configuration  
If the power cord is connected to the AC inlet1 to supply AC power to the power supply  
unit, the SB1 lamp goes on green.  
„ Redundant configuration  
If the power system of the server is in the redundant configuration with optional power  
supply unit and the power cords are connected to the AC inlet1 and AC inlet2 to supply  
AC power to the all power supply units, the SB1 and SB2 lamp go on green. After turning  
on the server, the AC_R lamp also goes on green.  
SB1 lamp  
AC Standby  
AC_R lamp  
SB2 lamp  
lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10 Troubleshooting  
Power Lamp  
The power supply unit has the Power lamp. When the power of the server is turned on, the lamp  
goes on green. If the lamp is not lit after turning on the power of the server, the power supply unit  
may be defected. Contact you service representative to replace the power supply unit.  
POWER lamp  
NOTE: The server equipped with an optional power supply unit can  
continue the operation with the standard power supply unit if the other  
power supply unit is defected (redundant function). The defected  
power supply unit can be replaced with a new one in the hot-swap  
mode without power interruption.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-11  
LAN Connector Lamps  
LAN1 and LAN2 connectors on the rear panel have two lamps as follows.  
LINK/ACT lamp  
1000/100/10 lamp  
LINK/ACT lamp  
100/10 lamp  
LAN1 connector  
LAN2 connector  
„ LINK/ACT lamp  
The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the  
server. If the power is supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly  
connected with each other, the lamp is lit green (LINK state). If information is  
transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks green (ACT state).  
If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection.  
If the lamp is not lit still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected.  
Contact your service representative.  
„ 100/10 lamp (LAN1)  
The 100/10 lamp indicates whether the LAN1 port normally equipped with the server is  
operated through the 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If the lamp is lit  
amber, the network port is operated through 100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the  
network port is operated through 10BASE-T.  
„ 1000/100/10 lamp (LAN2)  
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether the LAN2 port normally equipped with the  
server is operated through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network  
interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the network port is operated through 1000BASE-T.  
If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through 100BASE-TX. If the lamp is  
off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12 Troubleshooting  
PCI Slot Lamps  
PCI Slot Power Lamp  
PCI Slot Fault Lamp  
PCI Slot Power Lamp  
The PCI slot power lamp lights in green when a PCI board is installed in the slot and powered up.  
PCI Slot Fault Lamp  
This lamp is available only when the operation system is Windows 2000.  
If the driver of a Hot Plug PCI board is stopped under Windows 2000 and then the PCI board is  
logically disconnected from the system, PCI slot fault lamp blinks in amber.  
If an error occurred on PCI board or the slot installed the PCI board, this lamp lights in amber.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-13  
FAN Fault Lamps  
FAN Fault lamp is adjacent to each fan module. These lamps are triangular in shape and point to  
their respective fans. When the cooling fan is functioning normally, the lamp does not light. When a  
fan is not functioning normally, the lamp lights in red. A cooling fan failure is also indicated by the  
status lamp located on the front panel. The failed fan may be hot-swapped.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the fan that is normally operating. Ask  
your service representative for replacement of the cooling fan. If a  
cooling fan fails, do not continue to operate the system, but ask your  
service representative for replacement as soon as you can.  
FAN Fault lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14 Troubleshooting  
ERROR MESSAGES  
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.  
Error Messages after Power-on  
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On Self-  
Test). When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the  
display unit.  
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware  
failure, use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a  
keyboard controller error and stop processing.  
„ Immediately after the server is powered  
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction  
(simultaneous key entry of Ctrl + Alt + Delete)  
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction  
„ During hardware initialization following restart of the POST  
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason, restart the server once again.  
If the same error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure  
normal operation of the server, however, make sure to follow the following restrictions.  
„ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on  
the screen following the server power-on.  
„ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the SCSI  
Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before  
contacting your service representative. The alarm indication would be  
a great help for maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-15  
POST Error Messages  
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The  
following table lists error messages, descriptions, and actions to take.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before  
consulting with your service representative. Alarm messages are  
useful information for maintenance.  
Error  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
code  
0200  
0210  
0211  
0212  
Failure Fixed Disk.  
Stuck Key.  
Keyboard error.  
Contact your service representative.  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
• Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
• Restart the system. If the error cannot be corrected,  
contact your service representative.  
Keyboard Controller Failed.  
0213  
0220  
Keyboard locked - Unlock key  
switch.  
Release the lock of the key switch. If the error cannot  
be corrected in spite of the release of the lock, contact  
your service representative.  
Monitor type does not match CMOS Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be corrected in  
- Run SETUP.  
spite of the start of SETUP, contact your service  
representative.  
0230  
0231  
0232  
System RAM Failed at offset.  
Shadow Ram Failed at offset.  
Extended RAM Failed at address  
line.  
Contact your service representative.  
0250  
0251  
System battery is dead - Replace  
and run SETUP.  
Contact your service representative to replace the  
battery. (After restarting the computer, start the  
SETUP to provide the setting again.)  
The default values have just been set. Start the  
SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error  
cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
System CMOS checksum bad -  
Default configuration used.  
0252  
Password checksum bad -  
Passwords cleared.  
The password has just been cleared. Start the  
SETUP to provide the setting again.  
0260  
0270  
0271  
0280  
System timer error.  
Real time clock error.  
Check date and time setting.  
Previous boot incomplete – Default Contact your service representative.  
configuration used  
Start the SETUP to set the date and time again. If the  
same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting,  
contact your service representative.  
02B0  
02B1  
Diskette drive A error.  
Diskette drive B error.  
Start the SETUP to set the "Legacy Floppy A" and  
"Legacy Floppy B" in the Main menu again. If the  
same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting,  
contact your service representative.  
02B2  
02B3  
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP. Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the  
error cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
Incorrect Drive B type - run SETUP.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16 Troubleshooting  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
02D0  
02D1  
System cache error - Cache disabled.  
The cache cannot be used. Contact your  
service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching  
limit.  
02F5  
02F6  
02F7  
0500  
0501  
0502  
0503  
0504  
0505  
0506  
0507  
0611  
0613  
0614  
0615  
0616  
0617  
0618  
0619  
061A  
0B00  
0B1B  
0B1C  
0B28  
DMA Test Failed.  
Software NMI Failed.  
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 01  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 02  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 03  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 04  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 05  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 06  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 07  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 08  
IDE configuration changed.  
COM A configuration changed.  
COM A config. error - device disabled.  
COM B configuration changed.  
COM B config. error - device disabled.  
Floppy configuration changed.  
Floppy config. error - device disabled.  
Parallel port configuration changed.  
Parallel port config. error - device disabled.  
Rebooted during BIOS boot at Post Code.  
PCI System Error on Bus/Device/Function.  
PCI Parity Error on Bus/Device/Function.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 1.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 2.  
Contact your service representative.  
Make sure that the server supports the CPU.  
If you are not sure, contact your service  
representative to request the maintenance.  
0B29  
0B2A  
0B2B  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 3.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 4.  
0B30  
0B31  
0B32  
0B33  
0B34  
0B35  
Fan 1 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 2 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 3 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 4 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 5 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 6 Alarm occurred.  
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur.  
Contact your service representative to  
request the maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-17  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
0B50  
0B51  
0B52  
0B53  
0B5F  
Processor #1 with error taken off line.  
Processor #2 with error taken offline.  
Processor #3 with error taken offline.  
Processor #4 with error taken offline.  
Forced to use Processor with error  
The CPU is degraded. Contact your  
service representative.  
Because an error is detected in every CPU,  
the system is forcibly started. Contact your  
service representative.  
0B60  
0B61  
0B62  
0B70  
DIMM group #1 has been disabled  
DIMM group #2 has been disabled  
DIMM group #3 has been disabled  
The error occurred during temperature sensor Contact your service representative.  
reading.  
Contact your service representative.  
0B71  
0B74  
System Temperature out of the range.  
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur.  
Contact your service representative to  
request the maintenance.  
The error occurred during voltage sensor  
reading.  
Contact your service representative.  
0B75  
0B78  
0B7C  
System voltage out of the range.  
The error occurred during fan sensor reading  
The error occurred during redundant power  
module confirmation  
Contact you service representative to  
replace the power supply unit.  
0B7D  
The normal operation can't be guaranteed with Contact you service representative to add an  
use of only one PSU  
additional power supply unit or replace the  
existing power supply unit.  
0B80  
0B81  
0B82  
0B83  
0B8A  
0B8B  
0B8C  
0B8D  
0B8E  
0B8F  
BMC Memory Test Failed.  
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.  
BMC core hardware failure.  
BMC IBF or OBF check failed.  
BMC SEL area full.  
BMC progress check timeout.  
BMC command access failed.  
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy -  
Could not redirect the console - BMC Error -  
Could not redirect the console - BMC  
Parameter Error -  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
start the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
0B90  
0B91  
0B92  
BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.  
BMC update firmware corrupted.  
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.  
All the commands and functions other than  
the FRU command and the EMP function  
can be used. This is not a fatal error. Turn  
off the power once and then on again to  
restart the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
0B93  
BMC SDR Repository empty.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
restart the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18 Troubleshooting  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
0B94  
IPMB signal lines do not respond.  
All the functions other than the function of  
accessing to SMC through IPMB can be used.  
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power  
once and then on again to restart the server. If  
the error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
0B95  
BMC FRU device failure.  
All the commands and functions other than the  
FRU command and the EMP function can be  
used. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the  
power once and then on again to restart the  
server. If the error cannot be corrected,  
contact your service representative.  
0B96  
0B97  
0B98  
0B99  
0B9A  
0B9B  
0B9C  
0B9D  
0B9E  
0B9F  
0BB0  
0BB1  
0BC0  
BMC SDR Repository failure.  
BMC SEL device failure.  
BMC RAM test error.  
BMC Fatal hardware error.  
BMC not responding.  
Private I2C bus not responding.  
BMC internal exception.  
BMC A/D timeout error.  
SDR repository corrupt.  
SEL corrupt.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
start the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service representative.  
SMBIOS - SROM data read error.  
SMBIOS - SROM data checksum bad.  
POST detected startup failure of 1st  
Processor.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the CPU.  
0BC1  
POST detected startup failure of 2nd  
Processor.  
0BD0  
0BD1  
0BD2  
0BD3  
0BD4  
0BD5  
0BD6  
0BD7  
0BD8  
0BD9  
0BDA  
0BDB  
0BDC  
0BDD  
0BDE  
0BE8  
0BE9  
0BEA  
1st SMBus address not acknowledged.  
1st SMBus device Error detected.  
1st SMBus timeout.  
2nd SMBus address not acknowledged.  
2nd SMBus device Error detected.  
2nd SMBus timeout.  
3rd SMBus address not acknowledged.  
3rd SMBus device Error detected.  
3rd SMBus timeout.  
4th SMBus address not acknowledged.  
4th SMBus device Error detected.  
4th SMBus timeout.  
5th SMBus address not acknowledged.  
5th SMBus device Error detected.  
5th SMBus timeout.  
IPMB address not acknowledged.  
IPMB device Error detected.  
IPMB timeout.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the board specified in the system event log.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the board specified in the system event log.  
Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-19  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
8120  
8121  
8122  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group  
#1.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group  
#2.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group  
#3.  
Contact your service representative to  
replace the four DIMMs in the relevant  
group.  
8130  
8131  
8132  
Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group #1. See the labels put on the DIMMs to make  
sure that the DIMMs of the same type are  
installed in groups. If DIMMs of different  
types are installed in one or more groups,  
contact the service representative to replace  
DIMMs properly.  
Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group #2.  
Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group #3.  
8140  
8141  
8142  
8150  
8151  
8160  
DIMM group #1 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #2 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #3 with error is enabled.  
NVRAM Cleared By Jumper.  
Password Cleared By Jumper.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 1.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 2.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 3.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 4.  
Processor 1 not operating at intended  
frequency  
Processor 2 not operating at intended  
frequency  
Processor 3 not operating at intended  
frequency  
Processor 4 not operating at intended  
frequency  
All processors not operating at intended  
frequency  
Contact your service representative to  
replace the four DIMMs in the relevant  
group.  
Turn off the power. Then recover the  
jumper setting to the original setting.  
Check the frequency of the CPU. If it is  
unknown, contact your service  
representative.  
8161  
8162  
8163  
8170  
8171  
8172  
8173  
817F  
8200  
Online Spare Memory was not ready.  
DIMM type mismatch is detected when the  
online spare memory feature is enabled.  
Contact your service representative.  
8201  
Mirroring Memory was not ready.  
DIMM type mismatch is detected or  
unnecessary installation in group #2 is  
detected when the online spare memory  
feature is enabled. Check the DIMM type or  
installation. If the error cannot be corrected,  
contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20 Troubleshooting  
The following figures show the location of specific components referenced in the POST error codes  
and messages table listed above.  
NOTE: Failed CPU or memory boards can be also identified with the  
BIOS SETUP utility.  
„ Fans  
Fan 5  
Fan 3  
Fan 2  
Fan 4  
Fan 1  
Fan 6  
„ Processors (CPUs)  
Processor (CPU) #4  
Processor (CPU) #3  
Processor (CPU) #2  
Processor (CPU) #1  
„ Memory board  
The DIMM group consists of four DIMM boards.  
DIMM group #3  
DIMM group #2  
DIMM group #1  
DIMM group #3  
DIMM group #2  
DIMM group #1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-21  
Beep Codes  
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.  
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For example, the  
beep interval 1-2-2-3 indicates 1 beep, pause, 2 beeps, pause, 2 beeps, pause, and 3 beeps notifying  
that the checksum error occurred on ROM.  
Beep code  
Description  
Recommended action  
1-2  
Option ROM initialization  
error  
1. Check if the setting with SETUP is correct.  
2. Remove the PCI board and install it again to check if  
it operates normally.  
3. Replace the PCI board and check if it operates  
normally.  
4. Replace the baseboard.  
Video BIOS initialization  
error  
1. Check if the connector of the display is properly  
connected.  
2. Replace the baseboard.  
1-2-2-3  
1-3-1-1  
ROM checksum error  
DRAM refresh test error  
Replace the baseboard.  
1. Check if the DIMM is properly installed.  
2. Remove the DIMM once, and then re-install it to  
check if it operates normally.  
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed  
DIMM or baseboard.  
1-3-1-3  
1-3-3-1  
1-3-4-3  
Keyboard controller error  
1. Check if the keyboard is properly connected.  
2. Replace the baseboard.  
1. Check if the DIMM is properly installed.  
2. Remove the DIMM once, and then re-install it to  
check if it operates normally.  
No memory or capacity  
check error  
All memory groups error  
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed  
DIMM or baseboard.  
1-5-1-1  
1-5-2-1  
CPU startup error  
1. Check if the CPU is properly installed.  
2. Remove the CPU once, and then re-install it to  
check if it operates normally.  
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed  
CPU or processor board.  
1. Check if the CPU is properly installed.  
2. Remove the CPU once, and then re-install it to  
check if it operates normally.  
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed  
CPU or processor board.  
No CPU error  
Power failure  
1-5-4-4  
2-2-3-1  
One of the internal boards has failed. Ask your service  
representative to replace the failed board.  
Unexpected interrupt test Replace the processor or baseboard.  
error  
NOTE: Beep code 1-5-4-2 informs you that AC power supply is  
interrupted due to power failure or momentary voltage drop and the  
system is restarted. This is not an error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-22 Troubleshooting  
SOLVING PROBLEMS  
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow  
the instruction given before asking for repair.  
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the on-  
screen message and contact your service representative.  
Problems with Server  
No screen display appears with beep:  
T Are DIMMs installed securely?  
→ Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly.  
→ Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific  
group. See Chapter 9 for the specifications of DIMMs.  
Fail to power on the server:  
T Is the server is properly supplied with power?  
→ Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the  
power specifications for the server.  
→ Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord  
for broken shield or bent plugs.  
→ Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.  
→ If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it  
outputs power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.  
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS  
setup utility of the server.  
<Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK]>  
T Did you press the POWER switch?  
→ Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power (the  
POWER/SLEEP lamp lights).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-23  
Fail to power of the server / SLEEP switch is disabled:  
T Is the POWER switch or SLEEP switch enabled?  
→ Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]>  
T Is the server running in the Secure Mode?  
→ The POWER switch and the SLEEP switch are disabled in the Secure Mode.  
(Forced shutdown is also not available.) To release the Secure Mode, enter the  
password specified with the BIOS setup utility.  
POST fails to complete:  
T Is the DIMM board installed?  
→ At least four DIMM boards are required for operation.  
T Is the memory size large?  
→ The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for  
a while.  
T Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the  
server?  
→ If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST  
may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding. In  
such a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard or  
mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the  
server.  
T Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?  
→ Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-24 Troubleshooting  
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):  
T Are cables properly connected?  
→ Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also  
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.  
T Is the power-on order correct?  
→ When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external  
devices first, then the server.  
T Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?  
→ Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that  
comes with the device to install its driver.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ When the server has PCI devices connected, make sure to set the PCI device  
interrupt and others with the BIOS setup utility of the server. (Most PCI devices  
generally do not require any change to the configuration, but some boards do  
require specific settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for  
details to make correct settings.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [PCI Device]>  
→ Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O port address  
or operation mode settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for  
details to make correct settings.  
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [I/O Device Configuration]>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-25  
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:  
T Is the cable properly connected?  
→ Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the  
server.  
→ The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is  
powered (not applicable to USB devices). Power of the server first and connect  
it properly.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server.  
Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [I/O Device Configuration] - [PS/2 Mouse],  
[Advanced] - [Numlock]>  
T Are the server drivers installed?  
→ Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and  
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.)  
Some OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to  
manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings  
are correct.  
T Is the server in the Secure Mode?  
→ In the Secure Mode, the keyboard and mouse are disabled. To release the Secure  
Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.  
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:  
T Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?  
→ Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.  
T Is the floppy disk write-protected?  
→ Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.  
T Is the floppy disk formatted?  
→ Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.  
Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server.  
Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check:  
[Main] - [Legacy Floppy A]  
[Security] - [Floppy Write Protect]>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-26 Troubleshooting  
T Is the server in the Secure Mode?  
→ In the Secure Mode, write access to the floppy disk may be disabled. To release  
the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.  
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:  
T Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?  
→ The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the  
CD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.  
T Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?  
→ The CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.  
Inserted the correct CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed:  
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.  
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.  
OK  
T Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or injured?  
→ Take the CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty or  
injured, reset and click [OK].  
Fail to access the hard disk:  
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)  
T Is the hard disk applicable to the server?  
→ Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.  
T Is the hard disk properly installed?  
→ Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not  
connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed (see  
Chapter 9).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-27  
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:  
T Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?  
→ Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.  
T Is the cable connection changed?  
→ The SCSI connector (B) on the baseboard in the machine can be used for either  
built-in file devices or external SCSI devices. The connection to external devices  
must be switched by modifying cable connection properly. See "Cable  
connection" in the Hardware Volume for details.  
T Are SCSI devices properly configured?  
→ When the server has external SCSI devices connected, device settings, including  
SCSI ID and terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes with the  
SCSI device for details.  
T Are the SCSI controllers (including optional controllers) properly configured?  
→ Use the BIOS setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to  
the SCSI connector on the baseboard. When the server has an optional SCSI  
controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it, use the BIOS setup utility  
that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper configuration. See the  
manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details.  
Cannot install the operating system correctly.  
T Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?  
→ See Chapter 6.  
During Windows 2000 installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the  
Event Viewer:  
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0  
during the paging operation.  
→ There is no problem on this issue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-28 Troubleshooting  
Fail to start the OS:  
T Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?  
→ Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.  
T Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive?  
→ Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.  
T Is the OS broken?  
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.  
(See "Recovery for Windows 2000" in this Chapter.)  
The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log:  
Description (D)  
The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level.  
To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of  
the least capable processor in the system. Should problems occur with  
this system, contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors  
is supported.  
T Has the CPU been expanded?  
→ If the different revision (stepping) of the processor is installed in the  
multiprocessor system, Windows 2000 logs the above information every startup.  
If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.  
The OS presents unstable operation:  
T Did you update the system?  
→ Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable  
operation. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system.  
(See Chapter 6.)  
When any trouble occurred, the system does not run according to the specification of "Restart  
automatically":  
→ When any trouble occurred on Windows 2000, the system may not restart  
automatically even if "Restart automatically" is specified. In such case, restart  
the system manually.  
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:  
→ If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced power off  
(forced shut down: continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds). The power  
will not be turned off if you press the switch just one time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-29  
The server is not found on the network:  
T Is the LAN cable connected?  
→ Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server.  
Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms with the network interface  
standard.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the  
server. Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check:  
[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Embedded NIC 1], [Embedded NIC 2]>  
T Have the protocol and service already configured?  
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,  
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.  
T Is the transfer speed correct?  
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link Speed  
& Duplex" value the same as the value specified for HUB.  
The processor name displayed in [General] tab of [System Property] is not in correct position.  
→ There is no problem for operation.  
The system displays the message below and fails to log in.  
→ In Windows Server 2003, the following message will be displayed if you use the  
operating system without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and  
execute the procedure for license authentication.  
Windows Product Activation  
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can  
continue, You cannot log on until you activate Windows.  
Do you want to activate Windows now?  
To shut down the computer, click Cancel.  
YES  
NO  
Cancel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-30 Troubleshooting  
About System Log when re-starting the system on Windows Server 2003  
Type:  
Source:  
Event ID:  
Warning  
E100B  
4
Description: Adapter Intel(R) PRO/100 Network Connection: Adapter Link Down  
→ When re-starting the system without connecting the network cable, this log may  
be found in system event log.  
But this has no effect on the behavior of LAN driver.  
Confirm that the system is connected with the LAN cable properly.  
If 100Base LAN port is not utilized, disable 100Base LAN on device manager or  
disable it on BIOS configuration. Then, the log will not be registered.  
Event logs in using SNMP Service in Windows Server 2003  
Event Type:  
Warning  
Event Source: EvntAgnt  
Event Category: None  
Event ID:  
1015  
Description:  
TraceLevel parameter not located in registry;  
Default trace level used is 32.  
Event Type:  
Warning  
Event Source: EvntAgnt  
Event Category: None  
Event ID:  
1003  
Description:  
TraceFileName parameter not located in registry;  
Default trace file used is .  
→ The system will not be affect by these event logs. SNMP will not be affected  
either, so that you can ignore these logs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-31  
A PCI board is not recognized.  
T Is the PCI board installed correctly?  
→ Confirm that the PCI board is installed in the slot correctly.  
T Is the proper IRQ assigned for the board?  
→ Assign the proper IRQ by referring to the Chapter 4.  
T Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot to install SCSI card (excluding  
the array board used for OS boot)?  
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot  
number of installed board) - [Option ROM Scan]>  
T Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot for added network board which  
is not used for network boot?  
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot  
number of installed board) - [Option ROM Scan]>  
PCI hot-plug fails:  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ You must change the BIOS configuration to use the PCI hot-plug feature.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] -  
[Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]>  
*
Setting value depends on the board to be installed. See Chapter 4 for details.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] -  
[Empty Bus Default Speed] - [PCI Slots 5-6] or [PCI Slots 7-8] - Transfer speed of  
the board to be installed>  
The driver of a PCI board cannot be stopped from the OS when Hot Remove or Hot Replace is  
executed for the PCI board:  
T Is another software using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to  
be executed?  
→ If another software is using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace  
is to be executed, the driver of the PCI board cannot be stopped.  
Terminate the software, then stop the driver of the PCI board. If executing Hot  
Replace, restart the software after having mounted a new PCI board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-32 Troubleshooting  
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:  
T Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server?  
→ If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the  
server, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server.  
Use the BIOS setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from  
the CD-ROM drive first.  
<Menu to check: [Boot]>  
T Is an error message appeared?  
→ When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, the  
following message appears.  
After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective  
action according to the message listed in the table below.  
Message  
Cause and Remedy  
This machine is not supported.  
This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is  
not designed for this server. Execute the  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant  
server.  
NvRAM access error.  
Hard disk access error.  
An access to the nonvolatile memory  
(NvRAM) is not acceptable.  
The hard disk is not connected or it is failed.  
Check whether the hard disk is correctly  
connected.  
The system-specific information  
does not exist on the baseboard.  
Please restore the backup data or  
write the data by using [System  
Information Management] of the  
Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
The system-specific information cannot be  
acquired in the baseboard exchange and so  
on.  
Only the authorized personnel are  
allowed to do this operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-33  
Problems with Express Setup  
<For Windows 2000>  
Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk that has  
smaller capacity than the specified partition size:  
The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk.  
The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.  
Setup will continue the process.  
OK  
→ It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.  
The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD-ROM or checking  
CD-ROM:  
→ Press R. When any messages appear again even if you press R, restart the Express  
Setup from the beginning. In case the same result occurred after the restart of  
installation, contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them to check the CD-  
ROM drive.  
Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.  
→ There are some errors on the specified setup information.  
Follow the instruction to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the  
installation. On Windows 2000, you might be asked to press Enter again after the  
last reboot of the setup.  
[Complete] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.  
→ If you click [Complete] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup  
for the later specification to continue the process.  
<The Default Value for Windows 2000>  
The specification of network protocol  
Protocol :  
Service :  
Client :  
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]  
Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer.  
Microsoft network client.  
Component :  
Application :  
SNMP, IIS (Excluding Professional/Windows Server 2003)  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
Power Console Plus (When connecting disk array controller)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-34 Troubleshooting  
[Complete] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.  
→ The [Complete] does not appear if the setup information file that has already been  
created is loaded.  
→ [Complete] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen.  
Once you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [Complete] will not  
appear even if you enter [Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.  
Select [Use Existing Array] at [New/Existing RAID Configuration], but the OS is installed in the  
whole area of the disk.  
→
Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance area)?  
If the partition other than the one to re-use does not exist, the setup will reserve the  
whole area of the disk to install Windows 2000.  
Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.  
→ When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the  
system as Workgroup. Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the  
Domain.  
Specified large value as partition size, but when Windows 2000 is actually started, the system  
partition is created by 4095MB.  
→ Is the [Partition Size] specified by the value larger than the real area? If you want to  
create one partition in all area of the hard disk(excluding the maintenance area) to  
install the OS, specify [All Area].  
Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value.  
→ If the specified display resolution can not be used, the system will use the nearest  
value or the default value of the driver.  
Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.  
→ Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start.  
However, the setup will stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in this  
case, input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup completed during  
Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem on Windows  
2000 setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-35  
Unable to specify the details of Network adapter.  
→ In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specify them  
from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000.  
Windows 2000 is started with Network adapter that has not been specified during Express  
Setup  
→ Windows 2000 will install the recognized Network adapter specified as default value.  
If you want to modify the specification, it can be done from Control Panel after  
starting Windows 2000. Also, the Network adapter that has been specified during  
Express Setup but that is not connected will not be setup, though the protocol will  
only be installed.  
Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for each adapter,  
but all the protocols are specified on either adapter.  
→ It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used.  
The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by  
default value.  
When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP  
protocol are all set to use DHCP.  
→ When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of the  
protocol may all be set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.  
Not more than two Network adapter is connected, but the detailed specification of the protocol  
are all set by default.(e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP is specified)  
→ Are you specifying more than two protocols?  
In this case, the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network  
adapter, so the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default.  
Re-specify the details from Control Panel after starting the OS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-36 Troubleshooting  
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration  
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for any trouble occurred on disk array  
in this system.  
Problems with Master Control Menu  
The master control menu fails to appear:  
T Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?  
→ The Master Control menu is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95.  
T Is Shift pressed?  
→ Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.  
T Is the system in the proper state?  
→ The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing  
to set the CD-ROM. In such a case, start the Explorer and run \MC\1ST.EXE in  
the CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-37  
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator  
<Common to Windows 2000>  
The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed correctly  
during setting of setup information. (When the Trekking command is used)  
→ If the specified number of colors is fewer than 256 in the display setting, the bit map  
is not displayed correctly, but the setup information can be displayed correctly.  
The Point to Point tunneling protocol cannot be set.  
→ The protocol is not supported at present. After installation, set the protocol through  
Control Panel. In this case, rebooting is not necessary.  
The details of a network adapter cannot be set.  
→ Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters. Start  
Windows 2000, and set the details through Control Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-38 Troubleshooting  
COLLECTING EVENT LOG  
This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server.  
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow  
the procedure below after restarting the system.  
NOTE: The different revision processor may be mixed in additional  
CPU kit. When Windows 2000 is used, following message may be  
appeared in the System Log of the Event Viewer after extension the  
different revision of two or more CPUs in the NEC Express server. If  
this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.  
1. Click [Management Tool] → [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel.  
2. Select the type of the log to collect.  
On [Application Log], the events related to the running application is archived. On  
[Security Log], the events related to the security is archived. On [System Log], the  
events occurred at the item which configures Windows 2000 system is archived.  
3. Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.  
4. Input the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.  
5. Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and click [OK].  
For more information, refer to Windows 2000 Online Help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-39  
COLLECT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION  
This section describes on how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside  
specification.  
In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.  
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow  
the procedure below after restarting the system.  
1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].  
The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [System Tool] → [System Information].  
4. Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.  
5. Input the file name to save in the [File Name] box.  
6. Click [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-40 Troubleshooting  
COLLECTING DR. WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION  
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the  
information can be specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 5.  
MEMORY DUMP  
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.  
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the  
label. You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like. For more  
information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump (Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5 for  
detail)".  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Consult with your service representative before dumping the  
memory. Dumping the memory while the server is in the  
successful operation may affect the system operation.  
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message  
indicating insufficient virtual memory. Ignore this message and  
proceed. Restarting the system may result in dumping improper  
data.  
Preparing for Memory Dumping  
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is  
required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if  
"Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit" on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility,  
SETUP, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.  
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the  
server.  
1. Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility, SETUP.  
2. Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.  
3. Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-41  
Saving the Dump File  
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a  
straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch.  
DUMP switch  
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory dumping may  
not be available when the CPU stalls.)  
IMPORTANT: Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to  
break. Do not use any pin easily broken such as a toothpick or plastic  
pin. Use a pin having the length of 1 inch (25 mm) or longer.  
25 mm or longer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-42 Troubleshooting  
RECOVERY FOR Windows 2000  
If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged, use the following procedures to recover the  
system.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
After recovering the system, see "Updating the System" in Chapter  
5 and be sure to update the system.  
Also on Windows 2000, you need to update all the drivers after the  
system update. For more information, see "Installing and Setting  
Device Drivers" in Chapter 5.  
„
If the hard disk can not be recognized, you can not recover the  
system.  
Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk, not system recovery disk, to  
recover the system.  
1. Turn on the power of the system.  
2. Insert Windows 2000 CD- ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your server.  
3. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the server. (You may  
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
4. Press F6 while the message "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware  
configuration..." is displayed at the upper part of the screen.  
NOTE: Nothing is changed on the screen through F6 is pressed.  
5. Press S when the following message appears:  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.  
Select [Other] and press Enter.  
6. Insert Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk  
drive and press Enter.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
* Press ENTER when ready.  
Select the [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000)] and press Enter.  
Then, it returns to the screen of step 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-43  
7. Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 Controller Driver (When N8103-81F board is installed.)  
8. Press R to select the recovery option.  
9. Select the keyboard.  
10. If you are requested, press R to select system recovery procedure.  
11. If you are requested, select either of the procedure below:  
[Manual Recovery] (Press M)  
Do not select this option unless you are a high-level user or a system administrator.  
If you use this option, you can recover the problems of system files, partition boot  
sector, and start-up environment.  
[Quick Recovery] (Press F)  
This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anything during the  
procedure. If you select this option, the system recovery disk program starts to  
recover the problems concerning system files, partition boot sector of system disk,  
and start-up environment (if multiple operating systems are installed on the system).  
12. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen, and then press L at the screen which  
request you to insert system recovery disk. The system will be restarted once.  
NOTE: Starts the procedure without system recovery disk.  
13. Repeat steps 1 to 10.  
The recovery procedure will be started.  
During the recovery, the missing files and the damaged files are replaced either to the files  
in C:\ I386 folder of hard disk or the files in systemroot\ Repair of the system partition.  
These replaced files do not reflect the changes of the configuration after the setup at all.  
14. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen.  
If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during the procedure, it is  
useful to diagnose how the system has been damaged.  
15. Terminates the procedure if the recovery is successful.  
You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk if the computer  
is restarted normally.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-44 Troubleshooting  
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When you are  
unable to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility can be used.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales  
agent. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a file  
that describes operation of the utility, but do not attempt to use the  
utility by yourself. Contact your sales agent and follow  
instructions.  
„
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a  
client to the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-45  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.  
„ From the CD-ROM  
Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the  
system.  
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance Utility".  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.  
„ From the floppy disk  
Set the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the  
system.  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting "Tools" - "Create  
Support FD" on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„ Manual start (by pressing F4)  
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up screen of  
the server is on screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-46 Troubleshooting  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features vary  
depending on the way you started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)  
IMPORTANT: See the on-line help for details of the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility. For further information, ask your sales agent.  
„ IPMI Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and  
field replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.  
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.  
„ BIOS Setup Viewer  
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP  
utility to a text file.  
„ System Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to  
a text file.  
„ System Information Management  
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.  
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may not be  
restored.  
Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data.  
„ Start of Utilities  
With the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installed in the  
maintenance partition.  
–
–
–
System Management  
System Diagnostics  
Maintenance Partition Update  
„ Chassis Identify  
The lamp on the machine is flashed for five seconds. This is convenient if you have to  
distinguish a machine among many machines on the rack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-47  
RESETTING THE SERVER  
„ If the server halts before starting the OS, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.  
This restarts the server.  
„ Pressing the RESET switch on the front panel reboots the server.  
RESET switch  
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the  
data in process. To reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure  
that no processing is in progress.  
FORCED SHUTDOWN  
Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not  
turn off the server, or resetting does not work.  
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is forcibly  
turned off. To turn on the power back again, wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the  
power (forced shutdown).  
Press and hold the POWER  
switch at least 4 seconds.  
IMPORTANT: If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the  
power once to load the OS, and turn off the power again in the normal  
way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-48 Troubleshooting  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Upgrading Your Server  
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or  
removing such optional devices, and notes on using them.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or  
removed by any user. However, NEC does not assume any liability  
for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the  
server resulted from installation by the user. NEC recommends you  
ask your service representative for install or removing any optional  
devices.  
„
„
Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorized by  
NEC. Repair of the server due to malfunctions, failures, or damage  
resulted from installing inappropriate devices or cables will be  
charged.  
When you made any change to the hardware configuration, make  
sure to update the system (see Chapter 5 for details.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2 Upgrading Your Server  
SAFETY NOTES  
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3  
to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
■ Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
■ Do not remove the lithium battery.  
■ Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.  
■ Make sure to complete board installation.  
■ Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed.  
■ Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.  
■ High temperature  
■ Put a connector cover on an unused connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-3  
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES  
The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity. Avoid failures caused by  
static electricity when installing or removing any optional devices.  
„ Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).  
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal  
part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your  
body.  
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static  
electricity.  
„ Select a suitable work space.  
– Work with the server on the anti-static or concrete floor.  
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be  
generated, make sure take anti-static measures beforehand.  
„ Use a work table.  
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.  
„ Cloth  
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.  
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.  
– Take off any jewels (a ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.  
„ Handling of components  
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it to the server.  
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.  
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4 Upgrading Your Server  
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL  
Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components.  
1. Shut down the OS.  
2. If the front bezel is locked, unlock it.  
3. Grasp the right edge of the front bezel and pull the bezel towards you to open it.  
4. Slide the front bezel left to disengage the mounting tabs and remove the front bezel from  
the chassis.  
Frame  
Tab  
2
1
Unlock Lock  
5. Press the POWER switch to power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
POWER switch  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
6. Remove all cables and power cords from the server (the AC Standby lamps on the front of  
the server go off).  
NOTE: Make sure to disconnect the power cord from the outlet before  
installing or removing the option devices. If you remove the internal  
cable with the power cord being connected, the STATUS lamp will light  
in amber when the server is powered. Disconnect the power cord,  
connect it again, and then restart the server.  
To install the front bezel, follow these steps.  
1. Position the front bezel so the mounting tabs of the front bezel are aligned with their  
mounting holes on the front of the system. Slide the bezel right until the bezel snaps into  
place.  
2. Close and lock the front bezel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-5  
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES NEEDED  
„ Phillips screwdriver  
„ Small flat tip-bladed screwdriver  
„ Extraction tool for processor heat sink clips  
„ Antistatic wrist strap and conductive foam pad (recommended)  
„ Pen or pencil  
„ Product Configuration Record Table (Appendix E)  
As you integrate new parts in to the system, record the model and serial number of the server system,  
all installed options, and any other pertinent information specific to the server system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6 Upgrading Your Server  
DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE  
Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure.  
Hard Disk Drive  
The server has five slots to install hard disks (Ultra 320 SCSI) in the 3.5-inch disk bay of the front  
of the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not use any hard disks that are not authorized by NEC. Installing  
a third-party hard disk may cause a failure of the server as well as  
the hard disk. Purchase hard disks of the following models:  
– N8150-161F (18.1 GB, 10,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
– N8150-162F (36.3 GB, 10,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
– N8150-163F (73.2 GB, 10,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
– N8150-171F (146 GB, 10,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
– N8150-164F (18.1 GB, 15,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
– N8150-165F (36.3 GB, 15,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
– N8150-172F (73.2 GB, 15,000 rpm, Ultra 320)  
„
To make array configuration, refer to the manual that comes with  
the optional disk array controller board.  
All five slots may contain a hard disk approximately 25.4 mm (1 inch) high. The SCSI IDs of ID0  
through ID4 are always assigned to hard disks as shown below.  
SCSI ID0  
SCSI ID4  
SCSI ID3  
SCSI ID1  
SCSI ID2  
The 3.5-in. disk bay is connected to the Ultra 320 SCSI (A) connector on the baseboard when the  
server is shipped.  
To use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration, reconnect the cable from the connector on  
the baseboard to the disk array controller connector. In the disk array configuration, use the same  
model of hard disk drives.  
A dummy tray or dummy sponge is installed in the 3.5-inch disk bay. The purpose of a dummy tray  
or dummy sponge is to increase the cooling effect in the server. Install a dummy tray or dummy  
sponge block in slots not containing a hard disk drive.  
IMPORTANT: Use the appropriate dummy tray or dummy sponge  
block for this server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-7  
Installation  
Take the following steps to install a hard disk drive. This procedure applies to all the slots.  
NOTE: Any hard disk can be installed or removed in or from the server  
only by removing the front bezel.  
IMPORTANT: In the disk array configuration, use the same model of  
hard disk drives.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive.  
The server has five slots. Install hard disk drives in ascending order of the SCSI ID  
numbers. The SCSI IDs assigned to the slots are all determined (SCSI ID 0 to ID 4 from  
right to left).  
3. Remove the dummy tray.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the dummy tray for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8 Upgrading Your Server  
4. Unlock the hard disk drive.  
5. Firmly hold the additional hard disk drive (with the tray provided) and handle, and align it  
so that it engages the guide rails in the slot.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Push the hard disk drive until the handle hook butts to the frame.  
Carefully hold the hard disk drive with both hands.  
6. Slowly lift the handle.  
The handle is locked when a "click" is heard.  
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to get your finger caught between the  
handle and tray.  
NOTE: Confirm that the handle is hooked to the frame when having  
inserted the hard disk drive.  
Hook  
Frame to hang the hook  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-9  
7. Power on the server to check to see that the disk lamp on the front of the hard disk drive  
goes on (green).  
IMPORTANT: If a hard disk is added to the server operating in  
RAID1 by using the expand array feature, the RAID is automatically  
changed to RAID0+1. (However, it is not possible to set RAID0+1  
directly by using a specific utility.)  
Removal  
Remove the hard disk in reverse order of the installation steps 1 to 3. To use the server with the hard  
disk removed, insert a dummy tray into the empty slot.  
NOTE: If removing a failing hard disk drive, confirm the slot in which  
the DISK lamp of the hard disk drive is amber before starting the  
removal.  
DISK lamps  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-10 Upgrading Your Server  
When the hard disks are in the disk array configuration, you can restore the state before an error  
using the auto-rebuild feature that stores the data in the old hard disk into a new one.  
The auto-rebuild feature is available for the RAID1, RAID5, or RAID0+1 disk array configuration.  
Auto-rebuild is carried out when you hot-swap a failed hard disk with a new one (replace the disk  
while the server is powered). While auto-rebuild is in progress, the DISK lamp flashes green and  
amber alternatively to indicate it.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
When auto-rebuild fails, the DISK lamp lights in amber. Remove  
and install the hard disk again to restart auto-rebuild.  
„
If the disk array monitoring utility is installed, it may display or act  
as follows. If the DISK lamp does not light in amber after auto-  
rebuild, however, auto-rebuild has completed successfully.  
–
Displays "Rebuild was cancelled" on the screen while auto-  
rebuild is in progress.  
–
Appears to stop and restart auto-rebuild.  
Observe the following notes for auto-rebuild.  
„ Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk error and completion of  
auto-rebuild.  
„ When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk  
back again.  
„ Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress. (The DISK lamp flashes  
in green and amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-11  
Power Supply Unit  
Even if a single power supply unit fails, the server can continue its operation without interruption  
when additional power supply unit is installed (in the redundant configuration).  
Installation  
Take the following steps to install a power supply unit:  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Loosen a screw to remove the blank cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.  
PS1 slot  
(indicated as PS1/AC1)  
PS2 slot  
(indicated as PS_SHARE)  
PS3 slot  
(indicated as PS2/AC2)  
3. Slide the power supply unit into the vacant slot until you feel resistance.  
IMPORTANT: The power supply unit engaging its connector causes  
the resistance. To avoid damaging the power supply unit, do not tilt or  
twist the unit as you push it into the connector.  
4. Push the power supply unit into the slot until the locking tab snaps into place.  
5. Tighten the captive screw that retains the power supply unit.  
Screw  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-12 Upgrading Your Server  
6. Connect two power cords.  
Use the power cord provided with the standard power supply unit and the one provided  
with the optional unit. The AC Standby lamps (the SB1 and SB2 lamps) go on when the  
power cords are connected.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Dust cover is attached to the AC inlet 2 connector. Keep the  
removed dust cover for future use.  
„
Fasten the power cords with the lock spring.  
AC inlet for additional power  
supply unit  
AC Standby lamps (SB1 and  
SB2 lamps) go on.  
7. Power on the server.  
The POWER lamp on the power supply units goes on. When the server is redundant  
power supply configuration, AC_R lamp on the front of the server goes on.  
8. Confirm, by the STATUS lamp or on the POST diagnostic screen, that there are no errors  
related to the power supply units.  
See Chapter 8 for details on the error messages.  
If the POWER lamps are off, reinstall the power supply units. If the POWER lamps are  
still off, contact your sales representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-13  
Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit  
Replace only a failing power supply unit.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a power supply unit operating  
normally.  
NOTE: If one power supply unit fails while the server contains three  
power supply units in a redundant configuration, the failing power  
supply unit can be replaced with the system operating (power-on state).  
(Skip step 2.)  
1. Check the POWER lamp on the power supply unit and determine which unit needs to be  
replaced.  
The lamp of the failing power supply unit is off.  
2. Shutdown the system, and turn off the server.  
3. Loosen the captive screw that retains the power supply unit.  
4. While pressing down on the locking tab, grasp the handle and carefully pull the power  
supply unit out of the power supply bay.  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the power supply unit, do not tilt  
or twist the unit as you pull it from the power supply bay. The module  
disengaging from its connector causes the initial resistance you will feel.  
Use even, steady force to remove the unit.  
Locking tab  
Handle  
Screw  
POWER lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-14 Upgrading Your Server  
5. If you are not going to install a replacement power supply unit, you must install a blank  
cover you removed in step 2 of installation procedure to vacant slot.  
IMPORTANT: To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the  
blank cover in the vacant slot of the power supply bay.  
6. Install the new power supply unit taking steps 3 to 7 of "Installation", and confirm that the  
power supply unit is installed normally.  
NOTE: If one of the three power supply units of the server is replaced  
while the power is on, the POWER lamp of the new power supply unit  
goes on. (If it is replaced while the power is off, the lamp goes on after  
the power is turned on.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-15  
Server ~ Extending from the Rack Cabinet~  
The server needs to be pulled out from the rack for installing/removing any components other than  
the hard disk drives and power supply units.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3  
to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.  
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.  
■ Note high temperature.  
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.  
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Loosen the four screws from the front of the server.  
Screws  
Screws  
3. Hold the flame on the front of the server and slowly pull out the server from the rack.  
The server is latched when a "click" is heard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-16 Upgrading Your Server  
When inserting the server back into the rack, push the release levers on the rails on the sides of the  
server to unlatch the server. Be very careful not to get your finger caught in doing so.  
Release lever  
IMPORTANT: Push the release lever using a screwdriver or the like.  
Pushing the lever with your finger may hurt your finger.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-17  
Front Access Cover  
To install or remove devices in the 5.25-inch device bay, you will need to remove the front access  
cover.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3  
to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.  
Removal  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack cabinet.  
3. Remove the three screws.  
4. While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the front of the server.  
5. Lift the cover up and off of the server.  
Installation  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the front access cover, check that  
you have not left tools or loose parts inside the system.  
1. Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots.  
2. While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the rear of the chassis until the  
cover tabs fully engage the chassis slots.  
3. Attach the cover to the chassis with the three screws removed earlier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-18 Upgrading Your Server  
5.25-inch Peripheral Device  
The server has one slot for installing a backup device such as a magnetic tape drive.  
5.25-inch device bay  
Installation Considerations  
The server can contain a single-height SCSI device or IDE device.  
„ SCSI device  
Set SCSI IDs to ID0 - ID6 when you connect the device with the Ultra 320 (B) connector  
on the baseboard. The termination setting should be "invalid."  
„ IDE device  
Connect the IDE device to the unused connector of standard CD-ROM drive cable. Set the  
device as "Slave" using the jumper pin of the device. Refer to the manual coming with the  
IDE device for details.  
Installation  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Open the front access cover.  
4. Remove the drive from its protective wrapper and place it on an antistatic surface.  
5. Record the new drive model and serial numbers in your equipment log.  
6. Set any jumpers or switches on the new drive according to the drive manufacturer's  
instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-19  
7. While pressing the locking tabs on the both sides of the dummy cover, pull the dummy  
cover out of the server.  
8. Remove the screws securing the latching rails mounted on the dummy cover.  
9. Tighten the two mounting screws coming with the server to secure a latching rail to each  
side of the drive.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Use the bottom raw screw holes on the latching rail (see figure  
below).  
„
Always use the screws coming with the server. Using longer screws  
or those of different diameter may cause the device to be broken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-20 Upgrading Your Server  
10. Position the drive with the left side lower so that the latching rails engage the guide rails  
in the 5.25-inch device bay.  
Push the drive into the bay until the latching rails lock in place.  
11. Connect the signal and power cables to the drive. You can insert the keyed connectors  
only one way.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The built-in SCSI cable previously has wide-narrow conversion  
connector. Remove the wide-narrow conversion connectors from  
the SCSI cable and connect the SCSI connector appropriate for the  
devices if the 5.25-inch device has 68-pin SCSI connector. Keep  
the removed wide-narrow conversion connector carefully.  
„
„
Connector pin bending or incomplete connection may cause a  
malfunction to occur. Provide the connection securely watching  
the 5.25-inch device and cable connectors.  
Connector cover is attached to the power cable. Keep the removed  
connector cover for future use.  
NOTE: Make sure that the cables are not caught while the 5.25-inch  
device is pushed into the slot.  
Ultra 320 (B) connector  
Interface cable  
Device  
Power cable  
12. Install the components you removed previously.  
13. Make the setup according to "SCSI BIOS" in Chapter 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-21  
Removal  
Remove the device in reverse order of the installation steps.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
To remove a cable from the signal connector, pull out the cable with  
holding the pull-tab on the cable connector. Pulling out the cable  
with holding the cable may make some pins bent and/or some  
internal wires disconnected. This may cause a malfunction to  
occur  
„
If you leave the 5.25-inch device bay empty, install a dummy cover  
on the bay for proper cooling and airflow. Installing a device in the  
bay or covering the bay with a dummy cover protects the System  
EMI integrity and cooling. When you install a drive, save the  
dummy cover to reinstall if you should later remove the drive and  
not reinstall one in the same bay.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-22 Upgrading Your Server  
Rear Access Cover  
The rear access cover provides access to the hot-swap fans and to the electronics bay that contains  
PCI add-in cards and the baseboard.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3  
to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.  
Removal  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Loosen the captive screws located on the rear edge of the cover.  
4. While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the rear of the chassis.  
5. Lift the cover up and off of the chassis.  
Tabs  
Installation  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the rear access cover, check that you  
have not left tools or loose parts inside the system.  
1. Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots.  
2. While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the front of the chassis until the  
cover tabs fully engage the chassis slots.  
3. Attach the cover to the chassis with the captive screws located on the rear edge of the  
cover.  
4. Reinstall the removed components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-23  
CPU Access Cover  
The CPU access cover provides access to the electronics bay that contains PCI add-in cards and the  
server board set such as a memory board, processor board.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3  
to 1-8 for details.  
■ Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.  
Removal  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Loosen the two captive screws located on the front of the CPU access cover.  
5. Lift the end of the cover where the screws are located and remove the cover.  
Installation  
Follow these steps to install the CPU access cover.  
1. Orient the access cover with the captive screws toward the front of the server.  
2. Insert the tabs on the rear of the cover into the slots at the rear of the chassis.  
3. Press down gently and tighten the captive screws at the front of the cover.  
4. Reinstall the removed components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-24 Upgrading Your Server  
PCI Board  
The server contains eight slots into which PCI boards can be inserted.  
Some PCI boards support the hot-plug function by which they may be installed or removed with the  
power of the server being on. Your server supports the hot-plug function. The PCI boards  
supporting the hot-plug function only include the N8104-111 100BASE-TX Adapter and the  
N8103-103 1000BASE-T Adapter.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure  
to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity  
from your body before handling the PCI board. Do not touch the  
PCI board terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the  
PCI board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section  
"Anti-static Measures".  
„
Be sure any empty expansion slots have a slot cover installed. An  
open expansion slot reduces the cooling and EMI integrity of the  
server and can affect performance and cause damage due to  
overheating.  
NOTE: The tab on the PCI board slot indicates hot-plug or non-hot-  
plug by its color. Hot-plug slot has the green tab (PCI slot #5 through  
#8), and non-hot-plug slot has the blue tab (PCI slot #1 through #4).  
Slot number  
Lamps for hot-plug PCI board  
(slots #5 to #8)  
Non-hot-plug PCI board slots  
(color: blue)  
Hot-plug PCI board slots  
(color: green)  
PCI #1, #2 (1st PCI bus,  
32-bit, 33MHz, 5V PCI)  
PCI #3, #4 (3rd PCI bus,  
64-bit, 100MHz, 3.3V PCI-X)  
PCI #5, #6 (4th PCI bus,  
64-bit, 100MHz, 3.3V PCI-X), hot-plug  
PCI #7, #8 (5th PCI bus,  
64-bit, 100MHz, 3.3V PCI-X), hot-plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-25  
There are three types of PCI boards: 5V PCI boards, 3.3V PCI boards, and universal PCI boards.  
A 5V PCI board must be installed in the 5V PCI slot, and a 3.3V PCI board must be installed in the  
3.3V PCI slot. A universal PCI board can be installed in any PCI slot.  
5 V PCI Board  
3.3 V PCI Board  
Universal PCI Board  
RAID Controller Considerations  
Note the following on the configuration of a disk array.  
„ To change the disk array configuration or the RAID, the hard disks must be initialized.  
If important data is saved in the hard disks used to constitute a disk array, first back up the  
data in other hard disks before installing boards and configuring the disk array.  
„ More than one hard disk is required to configure a disk array.  
„ Hard disks used in the disk array configuration should have the same disk revolution rate  
and capacity in packs.  
„ See table in the next page for the slot in which a board can be installed.  
„ Up to four disk array controller boards can be installed in the server.  
„ Several RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive [Independent] Disks) levels can be set  
for the disk array configuration in the server in which disk array controller boards are  
installed. Refer to the documentation coming with the disk array controller for details of  
the available RAIDs, data transfer rate, and array configuration.  
„ The available capacity of the hard disks in the disk array configuration is lower than the  
total capacity of the hard disks configuring the disk array while the disk reliability is  
improved (for RAID 1, 5, or 0+1).  
„ Set "Option ROM Scan," a parameter of the slot in which a hard disk is installed, to  
"Enable" in "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu of the BIOS utility SETUP.  
„ Replacement of disk array controller board  
Back up the disk array configuration information in the disk array controller board to the  
floppy disk and restore it to the replaced disk array controller board. Use the  
configuration utility for the restoration. Refer to the manual that comes with the disk  
array controller for details. If a disk array controller is replaced, create the configuration  
information newly by using the proper utility.  
„ When more than one disk array controller board are installed in the server, install the disk  
array controller board to which the system disk is connected in the PCI slot having the  
highest boot priority (from PCI #1 to #8). For example, if four disk array controller  
boards are installed in PCI slots #3 to #6, the system disk should be connected to the  
board installed in PCI slot #3.  
„ Standard Network  
An AFT/ALB teaming is unavailable in standard network (between onboard controllers).  
An AFT/ALB teaming with standard network and an option LAN board is also  
unavailable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-26 Upgrading Your Server  
List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots  
The following table shows the cards supported by this server and the available slots:  
PCI  
PCI-X  
#5 #6  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#7  
#8  
32-bit/33 MHz  
64-bit/100 MHz  
Full-height  
3.3 V  
Long/Short  
Product  
name  
N Code  
Profile  
Voltage  
Board size  
Hot-plug  
5 V  
Non-hot-plug  
Hot-plug  
N8103-65F SCSI controller  
√
√
–
–
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
N8503-56F SCSI controller  
N8103-81F Disk array controller*1  
N8104-103 1000BASE-T adapter*2  
N8104-111  
N8104-86  
100BASE-TX adapter*3  
100BASE-TX adapter*4  
√
√
√
√
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.  
*1 Up to 4 cards can be installed.  
*2 Up to 2 cards (up to 4 cards for AFT/ALB) can be installed.  
Supports hot-plug feature.  
*3 Supports hot-plug feature. Up to 5 cards can be installed.  
*4 Up to 2 cards can be installed.  
Onboard LAN Controller Considerations  
It is impossible to configure the Teaming function of AFT(Adapter Fault Tolerance)/ALB (Adaptive  
Load Balancing) in a standard network controller (on board LAN controller).  
And it is also impossible to configure the Teaming function of the same AFT/ALB on a standard  
network controller and an optional LAN board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-27  
Non-hot-plug PCI Boards  
This section describes the procedure of installing or removing a PCI board not supporting the hot-  
plug function from a PCI board slot.  
Installation  
Install a board connected to a PCI board slot in the following procedure. Take the following steps to  
install a PCI board on the riser card:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
PCI board slots #3 to #8 can accept 3.3V and universal PCI boards.  
PCI board slots #1 and #2 can accept 5V and universal PCI boards.  
NOTES:  
„
When a PCI board is installed, make sure that the terminal section  
of the board securely mates with the connector of the PCI board  
slot.  
„
The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are  
for protecting the PCI board already been installed. Take care not  
to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the  
PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in  
place.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the system and devices, always  
turn off the system before installing the non-hot swap board.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
You can ignore this step when installing the board to the PCI slots #5 to #8.  
5. Define the slot in which a board is installed.  
6. Press the retention tab at the tip of the additional slot cover to unlock and open the tab.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more.  
Doing so could damage the tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-28 Upgrading Your Server  
7. Remove the expansion slot cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the expansion slot cover being removed  
carefully.  
8. Remove the dust cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the dust cover being removed carefully.  
9. On the edge opposite the connectors, grasp the board by both corners. Orient the board to  
the vacant hot-plug slot so that the metal retention bracket is toward the rear of the  
chassis.  
10. Insert the board into the front and rear retention mechanisms. Carefully push the board  
until it engages and fully seats in the slot connector.  
IMPORTANT: If the board cannot be installed easily, remove the  
board once and then reinstall it. Excess force added to the board may  
cause the board to be broken.  
11. Close the front and rear latches.  
NOTES:  
„
„
Make sure that the tab is firmly locked. If the tab is unlocked, the  
PCI slot does not operate normally since the power is not supplied  
to the PCI slot.  
The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are  
for protecting the PCI board already been installed. Take care not to  
remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the  
PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in  
place.  
Tab  
Lock  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-29  
12. Reinstall the removed components.  
13. Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear  
in POST.  
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in  
Chapter 8.  
14. Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the "Advanced"  
menu to "Yes."  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
Removal  
Remove the board in the reverse procedure of the installation. Then install the connector cap and  
additional slot cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-30 Upgrading Your Server  
Hot-plug PCI Board  
On the PCI board slots #5 through #8, you can replace or add a hot-plug PCI board while the server  
is operating.  
Only N8104-111 100BASE-TX Adapter and N8104-103 1000BASE-T Adapter support the Hot-  
plug PCI feature.  
The PCI hot-plug function includes the following functions:  
„ Hot Add  
Use Hot Add to install a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
„ Hot Remove  
Use Hot Remove to remove a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
„ Hot Replace  
Use Hot Replace to replace a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
„
Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot  
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system (Windows 2000).  
Failure to do so may cause the system to fail.  
For Windows 2000 server, do not use a function in inactive state after  
executing the PCI Hot-plug function. The system fails to return to the  
original state when a function in inactive state is restarted.  
Use the BIOS Setup utility to set the following before executing the PCI  
Hot Plug function:  
Select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration] → [Hot-plug PCI Control] →  
[Reserving memory space for PHP] → Select memory space for installed  
board*1.  
Select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration] → [Hot-plug PCI Control] →  
[Empty Bus Default Speed] → Select the frequency for installed board*2  
*1 If this menu is set to other than "Disabled," the memory capacity appears to be  
less than the actually installed memory capacity.  
*2 An appropriate parameter of the installed board is applied to the slot by the  
system after installing the board and rebooting the system.  
„
„
To execute the PCI Hot-plug function, be sure to login the system as  
Administrator.  
The board available for the hot addition varies depending on the clock rate  
previously set by PCI slots #5 and #6 or #7 and #8. Set the clock rate  
depending on the used PCI board appropriately referring to the description  
on the next page to use the BIOS Setup Utility. If a PCI board operating at  
a different clock rate is subject to the hot addition, the PCI slot fault lamp  
goes on and the hot plug cannot be done correctly. However, restarting the  
system allows BIOS to ignore the setting value and automatically operate  
the system with the optimum setting.  
[Advanced] → [PCI Configuration] → [Hot-plug PCI Control] → [Empty  
bus Default Speed]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-31  
Requirements for Hot Add  
„ No boards installed in the same bus  
BIOS setting  
Description  
PCI boards operating at any kind of clock speed  
PCI 33 MHz  
PCI 66 MHz  
available for Hot Add (However, boards operating at  
over 66 MHz will operate at 33 MHz.)  
PCI boards operating at either PCI-66MHz or PCI-X  
66MHz/100MHz available for Hot Add (However,  
boards operating at PCI-X 66MHz/100MHz will operate  
at PCI 66MHz)  
Clock speed  
PCI boards operating at PCI-X 66MHz/100MHz  
PCI-X 66 MHz available for Hot Add (However, boards operating at  
PCI-X 100MHz will operate at PCI-X 66MHz)  
Only PCI boards operating at PCI-X 100 MHz available  
PCI-X 100  
MHz  
for Hot Add  
Provide Hot Add for PCI boards  
operating at the same clock.  
„ PCI boards installed on the same bus  
Provide Hot Add for PCI boards operating at the same clock.  
Status Lamps  
Four pair of LED indicators on the back panel of the electronics bay indicates the status of the hot-  
plug PCI add-in boards.  
„ PCI slot Power lamp (green)  
Lights when power is supplied normally to the PCI board installed.  
„ PCI slot Fault lamp (amber)  
Lights when an error occurs on PCI board or the slot connecting the PCI board.  
PCI slot Fault lamp  
PCI slot Power lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-32 Upgrading Your Server  
Hot Add  
Take the following procedure to execute Hot Add:  
1. Pull out the server from the rack with the power being on.  
2. Remove the rear access cover.  
3. Locate the slot in which you are going to install an additional board.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the slot in which you  
are going to install the PCI board is off.  
4. Push the tab at the tip of the additional slot cover of the slot in which you are going to  
install the PCI board to unlock the tab. Open the tab.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more.  
Doing so could damage the tab.  
5. Remove the expansion slot cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed expansion slot cover in a  
designated place.  
6. Remove the dust cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed dust cover in a designated place.  
7. Push the PCI board until the correction part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.  
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it.  
Be careful not to apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it.  
Applying excess force may cause damage to the PCI board.  
Tab  
Lock (for long card)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-33  
NOTES:  
„
The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are  
for protecting the PCI board already been installed. Take care not to  
remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the  
PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in  
place.  
„
After installed the long board, secure it with the lock on the upper  
part of the guide rail.  
8. Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.  
9. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board. The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once and  
then, goes on.  
NOTES:  
„
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, the  
operating system automatically recognizes the additionally installed  
PCI board and installs the driver.  
„
„
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault  
lamp goes on (amber).  
Be sure to close the tab slowly and correctly. Abruptly closing the  
tab may cause the system to fail to recognize the PCI board.  
10. Reinstall the rear access cover and place the server into the rack.  
11. Take the following steps to check if the additionally installed PCI board is recognized and  
operating properly:  
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administractive Tools], [Computer Management], and  
[Device Manager] in the order to start the Device Manager.  
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-34 Upgrading Your Server  
(3) Display the [General] dialog in the property to confirm that the device is normally  
operated.  
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-35  
Hot Remove  
Take the following procedure to execute Hot Remove:  
1. Take the following steps to stop the device driver used by the Hot-plug PCI board you  
want to remove:  
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the  
driver of the slot (containing the PCI board) from the operating system.  
Failure to do so may cause the system to fail.  
(1) Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.  
(2) Click on [Next].  
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click on [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-36 Upgrading Your Server  
(4) Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click on [Next].  
(5) Select the target device, then click on [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-37  
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click on  
[Next].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] terminates.  
(7) Click on [Finish].  
2. Pull out the server from the rack with the power being on.  
3. Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is  
off and that the PCI Slot Fault lamp is flashing.  
4. Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-38 Upgrading Your Server  
5. Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more.  
Doing so could damage the tab.  
NOTE: The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots.  
They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed. Take care  
not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the  
PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in place.  
Tab  
Lock (for long card)  
6. Install the dust cover and expansion slot cover on the slot from which you remove the PCI  
board, then slowly close the tab.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp blinks once, and that  
the PCI Slot Fault lamp is off. If the PCI Slot Fault lamp is on, open  
and close the tab again.  
IMPORTANT: To maintain the dust-proofing and electromagnetic  
radiation characteristics and cooling performance of the server, be sure  
to install the dust cover and the expansion slot cover on the slot from  
which you removed the PCI board.  
7. Reinstall the rear access cover and place the server into the rack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-39  
Hot Replace  
Take the following procedure to execute the Hot Replace:  
1. Take the following steps to stop the device driver used by the Hot Plug PCI board you  
want to replace:  
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the  
driver of the slot (containing the PCI board) from the operating system.  
Failure to do so may cause the system to fail.  
(1) Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.  
(2) Click on [Next].  
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click on [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-40 Upgrading Your Server  
(4) Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click on [Next].  
(5) Select the target device, then click on [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-41  
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click on  
[Next].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] terminates.  
(7) Click on [Finish].  
2. Pull out the server from the rack with the power being on.  
3. Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is  
off and that the PCI Slot Fault lamp is flashing.  
4. Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-42 Upgrading Your Server  
5. Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more.  
Doing so could damage the tab.  
NOTE: The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots.  
They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed. Take care  
not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the  
PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in place.  
Tab  
Lock (for long card)  
6. Slowly insert the PCI board into the server.  
7. Push the PCI board until the correction part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.  
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it.  
Be careful not to apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it.  
Applying excess force may cause damage to the PCI board.  
Tab  
Lock (for long card)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-43  
8. Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.  
9. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board. The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once, and  
then goes on.  
NOTES:  
„
If the server runs on Windows 2000, the operating system  
automatically recognizes the additionally installed PCI board and  
installs the driver.  
„
„
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault  
lamp goes on (amber).  
Be sure to close the tab slowly and correctly. Abruptly closing the  
tab may cause the system to fail to recognize the PCI board.  
10. Reinstall the rear access cover and place the server into the rack.  
11. Take the following steps to check if the additionally installed PCI board is recognized and  
operating properly:  
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administractive Tools], [Computer Management], and  
[Device Manager] in the order to start the Device Manager.  
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-44 Upgrading Your Server  
(3) Display the [General] dialog in the property to confirm that the device is normally  
operated.  
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-45  
Memory Board  
To install or remove the DIMM, remove the memory board first.  
NOTE: Up to 24GB of memory (2GB DIMM × 12) can be installed.  
(The DIMMs installed as standard need to be replaced in this case.) A  
DIMM of 256MB is installed in DIMM slots #1 to #4 at shipment.  
Removal  
Remove the memory board in the following procedure.  
IMPORTANT: The memory board is extremely sensitive to static  
electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to  
discharge static electricity from your body before handling the memory  
board. Do not touch the memory board terminals or on-board parts by a  
bare hand or place the memory board directly on the desk. For static  
notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
5. Hold the both edges (blue marking) of the memory board and gently lift the memory  
board out of the chassis.  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the memory board and DIMM, do  
not tilt the board while lifting up from the system.  
6. Place the memory board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-46 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation  
Install a memory board in the following procedure.  
1. Hold the both edges (blue marking) of the memory board.  
2. Insert the memory board into the guides at both ends of the electronics bay.  
3. Align the board with the connector on the processor board and press down on the board  
until it is fully inserted into the connector.  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the memory board and DIMM, do  
not tilt the board while pressing down to the system.  
4. Reinstall the removed components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-47  
DIMM  
Install the additional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) to the DIMM socket on the baseboard in  
the server. The memory board is provided with 12 DIMM board slots.  
The memory board contains 12 sockets in which DIMMs are installed. Four 256MB DIMMs are  
normally installed in DIMM group #1. (The DIMMs normally installed may be replaced.)  
DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of  
four modules.  
NOTE: Up to 24GB of memory (2GB DIMM x 12) can be installed.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to  
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity  
from your body before handling the DIMM. Do not touch the  
DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the  
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-  
static Measures" described earlier.  
Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC. Installing a third-  
party DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as the server.  
Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from  
installing such a board will be charged.  
DIMM group #3  
DIMM group #2  
DIMM group #1  
DIMM group #3  
DIMM group #2  
DIMM group #1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-48 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation  
Install a DIMM in the following procedure.  
IMPORTANT: Install four additional DIMMs for each group because  
the server uses interleaved memory. If DIMMs of different  
specifications* are installed in a group, the server does not operate  
normally.  
*
DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as  
follows:  
Example: Frequency of 200 MHz, buffered, capacity of 128 MB,  
raw address of 12 bits, column address of 10 bits, and  
single side  
200 / B / 128 / R12 C10  
S
Single side  
Column address  
Raw address  
Capacity  
Buffered  
Frequency  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
5. Remove the memory board.  
6. Locate the DIMM group which you are going to install DIMMs.  
7. Open the levers at both ends of the socket (1).  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the lever, do not apply an excess  
force to the lever.  
8. Push the DIMM straight into the socket (2).  
IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying  
too much pressure can damage the socket. Keyed DIMMs insert only  
one way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-49  
9. Gently push the levers to the upright position until they engage the notches in the  
DIMM.(3)  
10. Install the components you removed in steps 1 to 5.  
11. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 8.  
12. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] to verify that the  
installed DIMM shows the status "Normal". (See Chapter 4 or details.)  
13. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
14. If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 is in use, set the paging file size to the  
recommended value (total memory size * 1.5) or a greater value. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-50 Upgrading Your Server  
Removal  
Remove the DIMM depending on the following procedure.  
NOTES:  
„
To remove the failed DIMM, check the error message appearing in  
POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket (group) in  
which the failed DIMM is installed.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
5. Remove the memory board.  
6. Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM.(1).  
The DIMM is unlocked and ready for removal.(2)  
7. Reinstall all parts removed in Steps 1 to 5.  
8. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 8.  
9. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory Retest]  
→ [Enabled] to clear the error information of the removed DIMM. (See Chapter 4 for  
details.)  
10. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-51  
Memory Mirroring / Online Spare Memory Feature  
The server provides the memory mirroring and online spare memory features.  
To use either of these features, install standby memory boards in the server and select the desired  
feature from the BIOS setup operation.  
NOTES:  
„
„
To enable memory mirroring /online spare memory feature, memory  
boards in DIMM group #1 and #3 must be the same capacities and  
type.  
Contact your service representative if you need to use these features.  
Memory Mirroring Feature  
The memory mirroring feature places a memory group as spare memory in standby state. If the  
current memory group encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to  
the standby memory group. When this feature is used, the current memory group and the standby  
memory group should be located in DIMM group #1 and DIMM group #3, respectively. Memory  
boards (DIMM) cannot be installed in DIMM group #2.  
„ How to enable the memory mirroring feature  
– Installing additional memory boards  
Add memory boards (DIMM) according to the User's Guide.  
The memory boards for mirroring should be installed to memory slots belonging to  
"DIMM group #3. The installed memory boards must be the same capacities and  
type as the memory boards installed as "DIMM group #1." The table below shows  
combinations of DIMMs installed.  
DIMM group #3  
(Memory boards for mirroring)  
1GB (256MB*4)  
DIMM group #1  
DIMM group #2  
A
B
C
D
1GB (256MB*4)  
2GB (512MB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
Not installed  
Not installed  
Not installed  
Not installed  
2GB (512MB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
NOTES:  
„
1GB (256MB*4) memory boards are installed in DIMM group #1  
as standard when the server is delivered.  
„
Column "DIMM group #3" shows sockets for online spare memory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-52 Upgrading Your Server  
Online Spare Memory  
The online spare memory feature places a memory group as spare memory in standby state. If the  
current memory group often exceeded the predefined threshold for the maximum number of  
correctable ECC errors occurrence, the online spare memory feature automatically switches to the  
standby memory group by copying the contents of the current memory group into the standby  
memory group. This feature enables continuous operation without replacement of the memory  
board.  
„ How to enable the online spare memory feature  
– Installing additional memory boards  
Add memory boards (DIMM) according to this chapter.  
The installed memory boards must be the same capacities and type as the memory  
boards installed as "DIMM group #1" and "DIMM group #2". Memory slots are as  
shown for "DIMM group #3". The table below shows combinations of DIMMs  
installed.  
DIMM group #1  
1GB (256MB*4)  
1GB (256MB*4)  
2GB (512MB*4)  
2GB (512MB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
DIMM group #2  
Not installed  
1GB (256MB*4)  
Not installed  
2GB (512MB*4)  
Not installed  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Not installed  
DIMM group #3  
1GB (256MB*4)  
1GB (256MB*4)  
2GB (512MB*4)  
2GB (512MB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
8GB (2GB*4)  
NOTES:  
1. Column "DIMM group #3" shows sockets for online spare memory.  
2. 1GB (256MB*4) Memory boards are installed in DIMM group #1  
as standard when the server is delivered.  
– Setting BIOS  
The menu item below has been added to "Memory Configuration", which is  
explained in Chapter 4. To enable the memory mirroring / online spare memory  
feature, change the setting of the item to each. The item is factory-set to [Disabled].  
Item  
Online Sparing/Mirroring memory  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Sparing  
Mirroring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-53  
„ Others  
– Memory capacity displayed on the OS = total capacity of physically installed memory  
– capacity for online spare memory  
– Enabling the memory mirroring or online spare memory feature does not influence the  
operations of applications.  
– The each feature is automatically disabled when the following error message is  
displayed:  
8200 Online Spare Memory was not ready.  
The memory board capacity for online spare memory (DIMM group #3) does not  
match the capacity of "DIMM group #1" or "DIMM group #2". Check the memory  
board capacity.  
8201 Mirroring Memory was not ready.  
The memory board capacity for memory mirroring (DIMM group #3) does not  
match the capacity of "DIMM group #1", or "DIMM group #2" contains memory  
board. Check the memory board capacity, or remove the memory board from  
"DIMM group #2".  
– The following indicates that the memory mirroring /online spare memory feature has  
worked:  
a) The Status lamp on the front panel of the server flashes green.  
b) The error DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts after the memory  
mirroring or online spare memory feature has worked.  
c) If NEC ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a  
system log of Event Viewer:  
Source name:  
Event ID:  
ESMCommonService  
2313  
Explanation:  
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.  
Memory number: XX  
Date/time: XX  
d) If report setting is made through NEC ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and  
ALIVE reporting is performed. The report contents are as follows:  
Explanation:  
Memory number: XX  
Date/time: XX  
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-54 Upgrading Your Server  
Processor Board Air Duct  
The processor board air duct is a cover for improving cooling effect of CPU. To install or remove  
the processor (CPU), remove the processor board air duct.  
IMPORTANT: To maintain the cooling effect in the server, the  
processor board air duct must be correctly installed into the chassis.  
Removal  
Remove the processor board air duct in the following procedure.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
5. Remove the memory board.  
6. Remove the screw holding the dual AC inlet (located at the top right rear of the chassis)  
and pull it clear of the chassis as far as the attached cords will allow. (1), (2)  
7. Holding the power receptacle and cords clear, squeeze together the two tabs on the air  
duct at the end closest to the rear of the chassis.  
8. Raise the end, rotating the duct until it is clear of the cords. (3)  
IMPORTANT: Do not hit on the ICMB board mounted at the rear of  
the chassis while rotating the duct.  
9. Disengage the tab at the front of the electronics bay and remove the duct from the chassis.  
Processor board air duct  
ICMB board  
Release tab  
AC inlet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-55  
Installation  
Install a processor board air duct in the following procedure.  
1. Orient the duct so that the two release tabs are toward the rear of the chassis.  
2. With the rear of the air duct raised, insert the tab on the front of the air duct into the slot in  
the chassis. The duct must be at an angle of at least 30° for the tab to engage correctly.  
3. Holding the AC inlet and attached cords clear, rotate the rear end of the duct down.  
Adjust the position of the duct until it falls into place. Do not force it down.  
IMPORTANT: Do not hit on the ICMB board mounted at the rear of  
the chassis while rotating the duct.  
ICMB board  
Release tab  
Processor board air duct  
AC inlet  
4. Move the AC inlet into place and attach it using the screw. (2), (3)  
5. Reinstall all parts removed in removal procedures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-56 Upgrading Your Server  
Processor Board  
To install or remove the processor (CPU), remove the processor board.  
Removal  
Remove the processor board in the following procedure.  
IMPORTANT: The processor board is extremely sensitive to static  
electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to  
discharge static electricity from your body before handling the  
processor board. Do not touch the processor board terminals or on-  
board parts by a bare hand or place the processor board directly on the  
desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described  
earlier.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
5. Remove the memory board.  
6. Remove the processor board air duct.  
7. Rotate the handles on the processor board until they are fully open. (1)  
8. Using the handles, tilt the processor board up and remove it from the chassis. (2)  
9. Place the processor board on a clean, dry, and static-free place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-57  
Installation  
Install a processor board in the following procedure.  
1. Insert the tabs on the processor board into the slots on the baseboard. (1)  
IMPORTANT: Do not contact the tabs with the components mounted  
on the baseboard.  
NOTE: Make sure that all the tabs are completely inserted into the the  
slots.  
2. With the handles in the open position, lower the processor board until it rests on the  
baseboard.(2)  
3. Close and press down on the handles until the processor board is fully engaged with the  
sockets on the baseboard.(3)  
4. Reinstall the removed components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-58 Upgrading Your Server  
Processor (CPU)  
The processor board includes four Intel Xeon MP sockets (one processor is mounted at the factory).  
Processor (CPU #4)  
Processor (CPU #3)  
Processor (CPU #2)  
Processor (CPU #1)  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to  
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity  
from your body before handling the CPU. Do not touch the CPU  
pins by a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk. For static  
notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
„
When using the server with the single processor configuration, CPU  
must be mounted on the Processor #1.  
„
„
Install the CPU in the numerical order (see figure above).  
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the dummy  
sponge onto the processor #3 and #4 sockets when the CPU is not  
installed to these sockets.  
NOTE: If the different revision of the processor is installed in the  
multiprocessor system, Windows 2000 logs the following information  
every startup. If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-59  
Installation  
Take the following steps to install the CPU.  
NOTE: To clarify the explanation, the duct of the retention may be  
omitted in the following figures.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the rear access cover.  
4. Remove the CPU access cover.  
5. Remove the memory board.  
6. Remove the processor board air duct.  
7. Remove the processor board.  
8. Locate the CPU socket which you are going to install CPU and remove the socket cover  
from the socket.  
9. Raise the locking lever on the socket.  
IMPORTANT: Open the lever until it stops. It can be opened to  
approx. 120 degrees.  
Retention  
NG  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-60 Upgrading Your Server  
10. Aligning the pins of the CPU with the socket, insert the CPU slowly and gently into the  
socket.  
IMPORTANT: Be aware of CPU direction. Pin layouts on two  
corners among four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion.  
Confirm the pin mark and pin layout on the socket, and insert the CPU  
correctly.  
Pin marks  
11. Push the CPU lightly to the socket, and push down the lever to secure the CPU.  
12. Put the heat sink on CPU.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-61  
13. Install the both heat sink clips as follows:  
(1) Hook one end of the clip over the tab on the retention.  
(2) Align the clip with the slot in the heat sink and press down on the center of the clip  
until it snaps over the center tab.  
(3) Snap the remaining end of the clip down over its tab.  
3
2
1
14. Make sure that the heat sink is level.  
NOTES:  
„
If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and then install it again. The  
following probably causes the heat sink not to be level:  
– The CPU is not positioned correctly.  
– The heat sink clip is not engaged correctly.  
Do not move the secured heat sink.  
„
15. Install the components you removed previously.  
16. Verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 8.  
17. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
18. To add one or more CPUs to the server in 1-CPU configuration to operate the server with  
more than one CPU, do the procedure below:  
For Windows 2000, change the driver of [Computer] in the device manager to [ACPI  
multi-processor PC] and then update the system (see Chapter 5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-62 Upgrading Your Server  
Removal  
To remove the CPU, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 and 7 in the installation procedure and  
do the reverse procedure of steps 9 to 13. For removing the heat sink clip, press the release lever on  
the clip down and release the clip from the tab on the processor socket.  
1
2
3
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed.  
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the dummy  
sponge onto the processor #3 and #4 sockets when the CPU is not  
installed to these sockets.  
„
After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of  
the heat sink adhere to the CPU. To remove the heat sink from the  
CPU, first turn the heat sink to the left and right lightly to make sure  
that the heat sink can be apart from the CPU. Removing the heat  
sink with it adhering to the CPU may cause the CPU and/or socket  
to be defected.  
Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed (or replaced).  
1. Start SETUP to select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" – "Processor Retest" in the  
order to clear the error information on the removed CPU (see Chapter 4).  
When a CPU is replaced, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" to confirm that the  
ID and L2 and L3 Cache of the additional CPU are defined normally (see Chapter 4).  
2. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-63  
CABLE CONNECTION  
This section describes the cable connection pattern within the server.  
IDE Interface  
A single IDE connector is installed on the baseboard. Two connectors are connected with cables in  
the normal status. One of the connectors is connected to the CD-ROM drive normally installed. The  
other connector can be connected to the IDE device, a built-in option installed on the 5.25-inch  
device bay.  
For the device installed on the 5.25-inch device bay, set the operation mode (MASTER/SLAVE) to  
SLAVE (for the setting, see the manual coming with the device). Connect the proper cables to the  
baseboard, CD-ROM drive, and option devices in the order.  
CD-ROM drive  
(normally installed)  
The operation mode is  
set to "MASTER."  
Optional device  
(IDE)  
IDE connector  
The operation mode is  
set to "SLAVE."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-64 Upgrading Your Server  
SCSI Interface  
This section describes the connection pattern of the SCSI interface.  
Baseboard  
Two Ultra 320 SCSI connectors are installed on the baseboard. The Ultra 320 SCSI (A) connector is  
connected to the 3.5-inch hard disk bay in the normal status.  
The SCSI (B) connector is provided to connect with the built-in option installed in the 5.25-inch  
device bay or an external SCSI device. When the server is delivered, the SCSI (B) connector is  
connected with the cable for using the 5.25-inch device bay. To use an external SCSI device, it is  
necessary to connect the SCSI cable coming with the server instead.  
Set SCSI IDs to ID0 - ID6 (the IDs should  
External SCSI cable  
be unique in the daisy chain connection).  
The termination setting should be "valid"  
for the furthest device.  
SCSI (B) connector  
To external SCSI  
device.  
SCSI cable for  
5.25-inch device  
3.5-inch disk bay  
Because both the external and  
Set SCSI IDs to ID0 -  
5.25-inch device SCSI cables  
should be connected to the  
SCSI (B) connector, either of the  
cables can be used at a time.  
SCSI (A) connector  
ID6. The termination  
setting should be  
"invalid."  
Optional device  
(SCSI)  
Termination  
connector  
The wide-narrow conversion connector (50 pins) is connected to the cable connector for a 5.25-inch  
device. To install a device with 68-pin connector on the 5.25-inch device bay, remove the wide-  
narrow conversion connector and then connect the 68-pin connector.  
To connect external SCSI devices, install the termination connector on the device at the furthest  
position or specify the termination with the internal setting of the device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-65  
Disk Array Controller  
The disk array controller board N8103-81F is an optional PCI board provided to improve the data  
reliability.  
The installation of this board enables the hard disks in the 3.5-inch hard disk bay of the server or  
those in an optional disk expansion unit to be used in the disk array configuration.  
3.5-inch disk bay (disk  
array configuration)  
Disk array controller  
No cable connection to  
SCSI (A) connector  
Disk array configuration of built-in disks  
On the server with the installation of the disk array controller board, how to connect the cables for  
modifying the hard disk configuration to the disk array configuration is described below.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the front access cover.  
4. Remove the rear access cover.  
If you are going to install the disk array controller on the PCI slot #3 or #4, remove the  
CPU access cover.  
5. Install the disk array controller.  
See "PCI board" in "Installation of options" to check the board installation position and  
install the board.  
6. Loosen the two screws with which the fan unit is fixed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-66 Upgrading Your Server  
7. Lift the fan unit straight to pull out it from the main unit.  
8. Remove the SCSI cable connected to the Ultra 320 SCSI (A) connector on the baseboard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-67  
9. Connect the SCSI cable removed in step 8 to the disk array controller.  
Route the SCSI cable through the point shown in the figure below when it is routed below  
the guide rail for the PCI board.  
10. Install the removed parts.  
11. Turn on the power of the server to confirm that no error message does not appear in  
POST.  
If an error message appears, write down the message and see the error message listed in  
Chapter 8.  
12. Start the BIOS setup utility to set "Reset Configuration Data" on the "Advanced" menu to  
"Yes."  
It is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.  
13. Configure the system by using proper utilities.  
See the online document stored in CD-ROM "EXPRESSBUILDER" coming with the  
server or the manual coming with the disk array controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-68 Upgrading Your Server  
Disk array configuration of disk expansion units  
The N8141-32F disk expansion unit can contain up to 14 hard disk drives. The cabinet is  
exclusively used for the server. The server with the installation of the disk array controller board can  
connect with up to 16 disk expansion unit (see the manual of the disk expansion unit for details).  
IMPORTANT: The disk expansion unit does not contain hard disk  
drives. Purchase them additionally.  
To connect the server with the N8141-32F disk expansion unit, any of the optional cables listed  
below is required:  
„ K410-93(01) expansion unit connection SCSI cable  
„ K410-93(03) expansion unit connection SCSI cable  
„ K410-93(06) expansion unit connection SCSI cable  
After connecting the server with the disk expansion unit, set the disk expansion unit to the disk  
array configuration using the Disk Array Configuration Utility. See Chapter 6 for details of the  
setting and the procedure.  
For the disk expansion unit with the disk array configuration, the auto rebuild feature provided by  
the disk array controller board allows the data defected due to failure of any hard disk installed in  
the disk expansion units to be recovered (replace the defected disk with a new one in the power-on  
status [hot-swap feature]).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-69  
External SCSI Cable  
To connect the external SCSI device with the server, remove the cable for 5.25-inch device from  
Ultra 320 SCSI (B) connector and connect the external SCSI cable coming with the server.  
The connection procedure is described below:  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the front access cover.  
4. Remove the rear access cover.  
5. Remove the CPU access cover.  
6. Loosen the two screws with which the fan unit is fixed.  
7. Lift the fan unit straight to pull out it from the server.  
8. Remove the memory board.  
9. Remove the cable from the Ultra 320 SCSI (B) connector on the baseboard.  
IMPORTANT: Save the removed cable carefully.  
10. Connect the external SCSI cable coming with the server to Ultra 320 SCSI (B) connector  
on the baseboard.  
11. Route the cable to the rear of the server.  
See the figure below for the cable routing.  
Route the cable below the guide rail for the PCI  
board from the position shown in the figure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-70 Upgrading Your Server  
12. Remove the blank cover from the rear frame by using a flat-tip screwdriver.  
Blank cover  
13. Remove two screws from the external SCSI cable connector.  
14. Align the cable end with the hole on the rear of the server.  
15. Fix the cable connector from the outside of the rear face with two screws removed in Step  
13.  
16. Install the removed parts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-71  
Serial Interface  
It is possible to move serial port B located at the front of the unit to the rear. Use the serial cable for  
the rear face coming with the server for the connection.  
The connection procedure is described below:  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Pull out the server from the rack.  
3. Remove the front access cover.  
4. Remove the rear access cover.  
5. Remove the CPU access cover.  
6. Remove the memory board.  
7. Loosen the two screws with which the fan unit is fixed.  
8. Lift the fan unit straight to pull out it from the server.  
9. Remove the serial cable from the connector on the front of the server.  
Serial cable  
10. Remove the serial cable from the connector on the baseboard.  
IMPORTANT: Save the removed cable carefully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-72 Upgrading Your Server  
11. Connect the rear serial cable coming with the server to the connector on the baseboard.  
12. Route the cable to the rear of the server.  
See the figure below for the cable routing.  
13. Remove the blank cover from the rear frame by using a flat-tip screwdriver.  
Blank cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-73  
14. Remove the screw located on the bracket of the rear serial cable connector.  
15. Hook the bracket of the rear serial cable connector from the inside of the rear face.  
16. Fix the serial cable connector from the outside of the rear face with a single screw  
removed in step 14.  
17. Change the settings of the jumpers on the baseboard, if it is necessary.  
See the jumper positions shown in the figure below.  
IMPORTANT: Do not change the other jumper settings. Failure to  
follow it may cause the unit to be defected or some malfunction to  
occur.  
18. Install the removed parts.  
When the cable is reinstalled on the front of the server, route the cable below the guide  
rail for the PCI board from the position shown in the figure below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-74 Upgrading Your Server  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
NEC Express5800/140Rc-4  
N8100-1023F N8100-1024F  
Disk-less  
Item  
Model type at shipment  
CPU  
Type  
IntelXeonTM processor MP  
Clock/2nd cache  
Number of processors  
Maximum  
2.2GHz/2MB  
3GHz/4MB  
1
4
Chipset  
Memory  
Grand Champion HE + CSB5  
Standard  
1GB (256 MB× 4)  
Maximum  
24GB (The standard DIMM must be replaced.)  
Expansion unit  
Expansion times  
Memory module  
Error check  
4 DIMMs (128/256/512/1024/2048MB)  
2 times  
DDR200 SDRAM DIMM (Registered)  
ECC  
Memory mirroring  
feature/Online sparing  
memory feature  
Available  
Graphics (VRAM)  
ATI RAGE XL (VRAM 4MB)  
Auxiliary  
Floppy disk (standard)  
3.5-inch drive × 1 (standard)  
input device  
Hard disk (standard)  
Hard disk (maximum)  
CD-ROM (standard)  
None (Hot-swap)  
730 GB (146 GB × 5)  
ATAPI Interface × 1 (Load on tray type, x24 speed)  
5.25-inch device bay  
3.5-inch disk bay  
1 slots  
5 slots (Hot-swap)  
6 slots  
Additional  
slot  
PCI-X 100MHz (64-bit)  
PCI 33MHz (32-bit)  
2 slots  
LAN interface  
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (1 port),  
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (1 port)  
External  
interface  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
USB  
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)  
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)  
4-pin (3 ports)  
Serial  
RJ-45 (1 port) D-sub 9-pin (1 port)  
D-sub 25-pin (1 port)  
Parallel  
Network  
Display  
SCSI  
RJ-45 (2 ports)  
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)  
Ultra320 SCSI (1 port)  
(Connecting the external SCSI cable coming with the server is  
necessary for external use.)  
Cabinet design  
External dimensions  
Weight  
19-inch rack mounting type (4U)  
483 (width) × 178 (height) × 711 (depth) mm  
33 kg (Max.)  
Power supply  
100 to 120 VAC ±10%, 200 to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1 Hz  
825 VA, 800 W  
Power consumption  
Environmental  
requirements  
Temperature  
Humidity  
10 to 35°C  
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Others  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported, NEC ESMPRO provided in  
the standard configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2 Specifications  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Other Precautions  
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller  
The baseboard includes the two network interface controllers.  
„ LAN 1 supports 10Base-T and 100Base-TX networks and a capable of full or half duplex.  
„ LAN 2 supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T networks and a capable of full  
or half duplex.  
The both controllers can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode  
connected to the HUB. However, for proper network operation, specify the "Link Speed & Duplex"  
value the same as the value specified for HUB.  
Server Management Software  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO  
utility.  
NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability  
enhancement features of the server.  
Floppy Disk  
The following describes use of the floppy disk.  
Floppy disk type  
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy  
disks:  
„ 2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)  
Stores data of 1.44MB.  
„ 2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)  
Stores data of 720KB.  
Shutter  
Catching hole  
Insertion direction  
indicator  
Head window  
Centering hub  
Label  
Centering hole  
High-density media hole  
(2HD only)  
Write protection  
hole  
Write protection switch  
Front  
Rear  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2 Other Precautions  
Notes on use  
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep  
the following notes in mind to use it:  
„ Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.  
„ Attach the label to the correct position.  
„ Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.  
„ Do not open the shutter.  
„ Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.  
„ Do not place anything on the floppy disk.  
„ Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct  
sunlight or close to a heater).  
„ Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette  
smoke.  
„ Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a  
chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them.  
„ Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.  
„ Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.  
„ Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Precautions B-3  
„ Write-protection  
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental  
erasure.  
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the  
floppy disk or format it. NEC recommends that you should write-protect any floppy disk  
containing valuable data unless you are about to save data.  
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.  
„ Disk format  
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to  
initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment (operating  
system).  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if  
any.  
„
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not  
available with the server. Use a formatted floppy disk to work  
with it on the DOS command line.  
The format method depends on your operating system. Refer to the manual that comes  
with your operating system for details.  
„ Data backup  
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk,  
digital audio tape, or magnet-optical disk).  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy  
disk, if provided.  
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as  
operator's misconduct or sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data,  
NEC recommends that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a  
regular basis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4 Other Precautions  
CD-ROM  
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:  
„ Press the center of the storage case to remove the CD-ROM from the case.  
„ Do not drop the CD-ROM.  
„ Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.  
„ Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.  
„ Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.  
„ Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.  
„ Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point  
pen.  
„ Do not leave the CD-ROM with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette  
smoke.  
„ Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct  
sunlight or close to a heater).  
„ When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its  
center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.  
„ Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or  
thinner.  
„ Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.  
Tape Media  
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the  
server.  
„ Saving your valuable data  
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save  
them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.  
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as  
well as to protect your valuable data and programs from loss.  
„ Three-generation data management  
NEC recommends that you should employ three-generation data management for data  
storage.  
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save  
data to tape A on the first day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on  
the forth day, and so on. That is, you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape  
A through C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Precautions B-5  
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read  
error. Also when both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable  
data by using the data stored in tape A.  
Keyboard  
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the  
keyboard. Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard.  
„
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of  
an angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy  
to operate. The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your  
shoulders, arms, and fingers.  
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the  
manual that comes with the software for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6 Other Precautions  
Mouse  
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer. Many OS's and application  
software require the mouse for operation.  
NOTE:  
„
„
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the  
software. For details, refer to the manual provided with the  
software.  
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or  
dirty desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the  
mouse. When your mouse movement seems dull, clean your  
mouse. (See Chapter 7.)  
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."  
Click:  
Press the button only once and release it.  
Double-click:  
Drag:  
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.  
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.  
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the  
keyboard.  
Click  
Pressing  
Click  
Click  
Click  
Double-click  
Drag  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
IRQ and I/O Port Address  
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find an appropriate one  
to install an optional device.  
Interrupt Request  
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:  
IRQ  
0
Peripheral Device (Controller)  
System timer  
Keyboard  
IRQ  
8
Peripheral Device (Controller)  
Real-time clock  
PCI/SCI  
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cascaded connection  
COM B serial port (PCI)  
COM A serial port (PCI)  
PCI/LPT2 parallel port (BMC IRQ)  
Floppy disk  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
PCI (BMC IRQ)  
BMCIRQ/PCI/ISA  
Mouse  
Numeric processor  
Primary IDE (CD-ROM drive)  
PCI  
LPT1 parallel port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2 IRQ and I/O Port Address  
PIRQ and PCI Device  
The factory-set PCI device interrupts are assigned as follows. Use the BIOS setup utility, BIOS,  
for interrupt setup. See Chapter 4 for details.  
Menu Option  
PCI IRQ 1  
PCI IRQ 2  
PCI IRQ 3  
PCI IRQ 4  
PCI IRQ 5  
PCI IRQ 6  
PCI IRQ 7  
PCI IRQ 8  
PCI IRQ 9  
PCI IRQ 10  
PCI IRQ 11  
PCI IRQ 12  
PCI IRQ 13  
PCI IRQ 14  
PCI IRQ 15  
PCI IRQ 16  
PCI IRQ 17  
PCI IRQ 18  
PCI IRQ 19  
PCI IRQ 20  
PCI IRQ 21  
PCI IRQ 22  
PCI IRQ 23  
PCI IRQ 24  
PCI IRQ 25  
PCI IRQ 26  
PCI IRQ 27  
PCI IRQ 28  
PCI IRQ 29  
PCI IRQ 30  
PCI IRQ 31  
PCI IRQ 32  
Interrupt  
On-board SCSI (Channel A)  
On-board SCSI (Channel B)  
On-board LAN #1  
On-board LAN #2  
On-board GA  
--  
PCI slot #1 (INT A)  
PCI slot #2 (INT A)  
PCI slot #3 (INT A)  
PCI slot #4 (INT A)  
PCI slot #5 (INT A)  
PCI slot #6 (INT A)  
PCI slot #7 (INT A)  
PCI slot #8 (INT A)  
--  
SCI  
PCI slot #1 (INT B)  
PCI slot #2 (INT B)  
PCI slot #3 (INT B)  
PCI slot #4 (INT B)  
PCI slot #5 (INT B)  
PCI slot #6 (INT B)  
PCI slot #7 (INT B)  
PCI slot #8 (INT B)  
PCI slot #1 (INT C), PCI slot #2 (INT D)  
PCI slot #1 (INT D), PCI slot #2 (INT C)  
PCI slot #3 (INT C), PCI slot #4 (INT D)  
PCI slot #3 (INT D), PCI slot #4 (INT C)  
PCI slot #5 (INT C), PCI slot #6 (INT D)  
PCI slot #5 (INT D), PCI slot #6 (INT C)  
PCI slot #7 (INT C), PCI slot #8 (INT D)  
PCI slot #7 (INT D), PCI slot #8 (INT C)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IRQ and I/O Port Address C-3  
I/O Port Address  
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:  
Address  
00 - 1F  
20 - 21  
2E - 2F  
40 - 43  
60  
Chip in Use  
8-bit DMA control register  
Master 8259 programming interface  
Configuration  
8254 programming interface  
Keyboard & mouse  
61  
NMI status register  
64  
Keyboard & mouse  
70 - 71  
80 - 8F  
A0 - A1  
C0 - DF  
E0 - E9  
F0  
NMI enable register/real-time clock  
16-bit DMA control register  
Slave 8259 programming interface  
DMA controller page register  
Base address register  
Register IRQ13  
F1 - FF  
170 - 177 or BAR2  
1F0 - 1F7 or BAR0  
278 - 27F  
2F8 - 2FF  
BAR or 376  
370 - 377  
378 -37F  
3B0 - 3BB  
3BC - 3BE  
3C0 - 3DF  
3F6 or BAR1  
3F0 - 3F7  
3F8 - 3FF  
40B  
Logical device configuration  
EDMA2-compatible mode primary command block register  
EDMA2-compatible mode secondary command block register  
(Parallel port 3)  
Serial port B  
EDMA2-compatible mode secondary command block register  
(Floppy disk drive 2), IDE 2  
(Parallel port 2)  
VGA  
Parallel port 1  
VGA  
EDMA2-compatible mode primary command block register  
Floppy disk drive 1, IDE 1  
Serial port A  
DMA1 expansion write mode register  
Master 8259 ELCR programming  
Slave 8259 ELCR programming  
DMA2 expansion write mode register  
SMBus control  
4D0  
4D1  
4D6  
580 - 58F  
900-93F  
940-97F  
C00  
PHPC1 register  
PHPC2 register  
PCI IRQ mapping index register  
PCI IRQ mapping data register  
PCI error status register  
Address & status control  
Rise time counter control  
General register (GPMs)  
ISA wait register  
C01  
C14  
C49  
C4A  
C52  
C6C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4 IRQ and I/O Port Address  
Address  
C6F  
Chip in Use  
Other control registers  
IPMI (MPI KCS interface)  
IPMI (SMI interface)  
CA2 - CA3  
CA4 - CA5  
CA6 - CA7  
CD6  
IPMI (SCI/SW1 interface)  
Power management index register  
Power management data register  
PCI configuration space  
Reset control  
CD7  
CF8, CFC  
CF9  
F50 - F58  
FE00 - FE3F  
BAR4+00 - 0F  
General chipset  
Chipset  
EDMA2 PCI base address register 4  
*1 Hexadecimal notation  
*2 The I/O port address of a PCI device is set according to its type and number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Installing Windows Server 2003  
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 without using Express  
Setup tool.  
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server 2003  
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server 2003  
Installation.  
Installing Service Pack  
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your  
system, prepare it by yourself.  
Updating System  
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM attached to your system.  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as 'MAINTE_P')  
In disk area, an area displayed as 'MAINTE_P' may exist. This area is maintenance partition for  
saving configuration information and utilities. Please do not delete the area.  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic  
Disk  
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to  
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:  
„ Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS  
newly.  
„ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2 Installing Windows Server 2003  
MO Device  
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file  
system will not be converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from  
the beginning.  
Media such as DAT  
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,  
such as DAT.  
Partition Size  
The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows Server 2003 is:  
2900MB + Paging file size + Dump file size  
Paging file size (recommended) = installed memory * 1.5  
Dump file size  
= Installed memory size + 12 MB  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug  
information (memory dump). If you set the default value of  
paging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, the accurate  
debug information(memory dump) may not be collected.  
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is  
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify  
4095MB for the paging file size.  
„
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory  
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if installed memory size is 512MB, the minimum required partition size is  
2900MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) = 4192MB.  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve  
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to  
be written to a separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after  
installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an  
additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 D-3  
INSTALLING Windows Server 2003  
Preparations for Installation  
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
„ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM) or Microsoft Windows  
Server 2003 Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM)  
„ User's Guide  
„ Getting Started  
„ Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER"  
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server which you  
are going to install Windows Server 2003, you do not need to create it  
again.  
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the  
following two procedures.  
„ Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK  
for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.  
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server,  
you can use the other procedure described later.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server .(You may also  
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].  
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create  
Support Disk] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4 Installing Windows Server 2003  
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
„ Create from [Master Control Menu]  
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.  
– Windows Server 2003  
– Windows 2000  
– Windows Me/98/95  
– Windows NT 4.0  
– Windows XP  
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from  
[Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operating systems  
operate.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0,  
Windows XP.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Master Control Menu] will appear.  
4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for  
Windows Server 2003].  
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the  
Right-click.  
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 D-5  
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation  
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.  
1. Turn on the system power.  
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.  
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while  
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.  
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.  
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear.  
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.  
Begin after turning on the system power again.  
4. Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.  
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.  
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has  
been pressed.  
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the  
floppy disk drive, and press Enter.  
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.  
Select the [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (WinXP/Server 2003 IA-32)] and press Enter.  
Then, it returns to the screen of step 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-6 Installing Windows Server 2003  
7. If the optional board is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller Driver (When N8103-81F board is installed.)  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.  
For details, refer to "Getting Started".  
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and  
Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.  
Procedure for License Authentication  
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label  
in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.  
NOTES:  
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after  
30 days is passed.  
„
COA label may be attached to your server.  
Updating the System  
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.  
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member  
of the Administrators group.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen.  
3. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NEC Express5800 system]  
section.  
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.  
5. Click on [Restart Computer] to restart the system.  
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately  
after clicking on [Restart Computer]  
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by  
adding or removing hardware or Operating system software  
components) or repair the system, you must run the system update  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 D-7  
Upgrade installation  
NOTE: If you are using N8103-56F, please carry out after removing.  
1. Procedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003.  
2. Power on the system and start Windows 2000.  
3. Log on as an administrator.  
4. Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Then, [Select an operation] dialog will appear.  
NOTE: If the [Select an operation] dialog box does not appear, start  
\SETUP.EXE from CD-ROM drive.  
5. Select [Install Windows Server 2003].  
Then, a dialog box asks to select the upgrade or clear installation.  
6. Select "Upgrade (recommended)" and click the Next.  
Follow the messages and continue. The system will automatically restart after copying  
the files.  
NOTE: You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM in CD-  
ROM drive.  
7. If a disk array controller is attached to the device, press F6 while a message, "Setup is  
inspecting your computer's hardware configuration...", is on the screen.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has  
been pressed.  
8. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
9. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy  
disk drive, and press Enter. A list of SCSI adapters will be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-8 Installing Windows Server 2003  
10. If the optional board is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller Driver (When N8103-81F board is installed.)  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.  
11. Update the system.  
12. Install the driver and make detailed settings.  
„ SCSI controller (N8103-56F)  
If your system has a controller (N8103-56F), system error will occur during the upgrade  
installation to Windows 2003.  
Disconnect SCSI controller and restart the upgrade installation from the beginning.  
„ If PROSet is already installed, uninstall the PROSet before upgrading.  
If the teaming function is enabled, disable the function before uninstalling PROSet.  
„ During upgrade installation, [Disk Insert] dialog box may appear.  
If it appears, click Cancel.  
„ When upgrade installation is completed,[Device Driver Wizard] dialog box may appear.  
If it appears, click Cancel, then update the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 D-9  
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS  
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.  
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please  
refer to the document attached to the driver.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory.  
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC11\PROSet\WS03XP32  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-10 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed  
and Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click  
[Local Area Connection].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.  
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
3. Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the  
value specified for HUB.  
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Specify the other network driver with the same progress above.  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be  
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 D-11  
NOTE: We recommend you to add "Network Monitor" at "Adding  
Services".  
"Network Monitor" can monitor frames (or packets) sent or received by  
a computer on which "Network Monitor" is installed. This is an  
effective tool for analyzing network faults.  
For information about the installation procedure, see Chapter 6.  
Re-install the Network Driver  
The network driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel]→ [Administrative Tools] →  
[Computer Management].  
2. Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy  
disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller](When N8103-65F board is installed.)  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI](When N8103-75 board is installed.)  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-12 Installing Windows Server 2003  
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP  
(DEBUG INFORMATION)  
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
Installing Windows 2000  
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows 2000 without using Express Setup  
tool.  
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows 2000  
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows 2000  
Installation.  
Installing Service Pack  
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your  
system, prepare it by yourself.  
Updating System  
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM attached to your system.  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as 'MAINTE_P')  
In disk area, an area displayed as 'MAINTE_P' may exist. This area is maintenance partition for  
saving configuration information and utilities. Please do not delete the area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2 Installing Windows 2000  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic  
Disk  
If there is other partition than the partition for OS installation and you want to leave it when  
installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:  
C:  
D:  
System Area  
Data Area  
↑
When you want to leave this partition  
„ Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS  
newly.  
„ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.  
MO Device  
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file  
system will not be converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from  
the beginning.  
Media such as DAT  
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,  
such as DAT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows 2000 E-3  
Partition Size  
The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows 2000 is:  
1000MB + Paging file size + Dump file size  
Paging file size (recommended) = installed memory * 1.5  
Dump file size  
= Installed memory size + 12 MB  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug  
information (memory dump). If you set the default value of  
paging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, the accurate  
debug information(memory dump) may not be collected.  
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is  
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify  
4095MB for the paging file size.  
„
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory  
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if installed memory size is 512MB, the minimum required partition size is  
1000 + (512*1.5) + (512+12) = 2292MB.  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve  
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to  
be written to a separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after  
installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an  
additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-4 Installing Windows 2000  
INSTALLING Windows 2000  
Preparations for Installation  
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
„ Microsoft Windows 2000 Server(CD-ROM) or Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced  
Server (CD-ROM)  
„ Windows 2000 Service Pack (CD-ROM)  
„ User's Guide  
„ Getting Started  
„ Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creating "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"  
Before installing, create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: If you have already "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server which you are  
going to install Windows 2000, you do not need to create it again.  
You can create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two  
procedures.  
„ Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.  
If Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server, you can use the other  
procedure described later.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server .(You may also  
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].  
6. Select [Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support  
Disk] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows 2000 E-5  
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.  
Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
„ Create from [Master Control Menu]  
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.  
– Windows Me/98/95  
– Windows 2000  
– Windows Server 2003  
– Windows NT 4.0  
– Windows XP  
You can create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master  
Control Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0,  
Windows XP.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Master Control Menu] will appear.  
4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for  
Windows 2000].  
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the  
Right-click.  
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.  
Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-6 Installing Windows 2000  
Windows 2000 Clean Installation  
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows 2000.  
1. Turn on the system power.  
2. Insert the Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.  
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while  
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.  
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.  
The Windows 2000 setup screen will appear.  
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.  
Begin after turning on the system power again.  
4. Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.  
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.  
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has  
been pressed.  
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
6. Insert Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk  
drive and press Enter.  
Select the [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000)] and press Enter.  
Then, it returns to the screen of step 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows 2000 E-7  
7. If the optional board is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 Controller Driver (When N8103-81F board is installed.)  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.  
For details, refer to "Getting Started".  
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and  
Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-8 Installing Windows 2000  
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS  
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.  
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please  
refer to the document attached to the driver.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory.  
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PROSet\WIN2K  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows 2000 E-9  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed  
and Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
3. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
4. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
5. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.  
Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.  
3. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
4. Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the  
value specified for HUB.  
5. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Specify the other network driver with the same progress above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-10 Installing Windows 2000  
Re-install the Network Driver  
After installing OS and deleting the network drivers, if you want to re-install the network drivers,  
follow the procedure below.  
1. Restart OS and logon to your system.  
2. [Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box appears.  
Click [Next].  
3. Confirm that the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)] radio button  
is selected and click [Next].  
4. Select the [Specify a location] check box and deselect other check boxes.  
Click [Next].  
5. Other [Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box opens.  
When using [Intel(R) PRO/1000 XT network connection], specify  
[<CD-ROM drive letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PRO1000\WIN2K].  
When using [Intel(R) PRO/100 network connection], specify  
[<CD-ROM drive letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC11\PRO100\WIN2K]  
Then click [OK].  
6. Click [Next].  
7. Click [Finished].  
8. Other [Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box appears.  
Refer to the step 2 to 7 to install.  
After re-installing the network drivers, the link speed and Duplex mode need to be  
specified.  
Refer to "Network Driver" described earlier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows 2000 E-11  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
Standard graphics accelerator driver that are mounted will be installed automatically. The following  
is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually.  
If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to  
the board to install the driver.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Run "Setup.exe" in the following directory.  
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\VIDEO\setup.exe.  
Follow the message on the screen.  
When the message "Digital Signature Not Found" message appears, click on [Yes].  
3. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the system following a  
message on the screen.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools]  
→ [Computer Management].  
2. Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk  
drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller](When N8103-65F board is installed.)  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI](When N8103-75 board is installed.)  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-12 Installing Windows 2000  
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP (DEBUG  
INFORMATION)  
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Product Configuration Record Table  
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.  
Hardware  
Main Unit  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
CPU  
#1  
Clock  
Clock  
Clock  
Clock  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
#2  
#3  
#4  
Memory  
Group #1  
Group #2  
Group #3  
Monitor  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Type  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Hard Disk  
ID0  
Type  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
ID1  
ID2  
ID3  
ID4  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-2 Product Configuration Record Table  
Backup Device  
Slot 1  
Size  
Capacity  
Serial No.  
Model name  
Type number  
Date Installed  
PCI Slot #1  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
PCI Slot #2  
PCI Slot #3  
PCI Slot #4  
PCI Slot #5  
PCI Slot #6  
PCI Slot #7  
PCI Slot #8  
Printer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Additional Cabinet for Disk  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
External Peripheral Device 1  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
External Peripheral Device 2  
Model name  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Display  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Keyboard  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Mouse  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product Configuration Record Table F-3  
Software  
Firmware version  
OS  
Name:  
Name:  
† HPFS  
Version:  
Version:  
Application of RUR media  
File system  
† Apply  
† FAT  
† NTFS  
† Others (  
)
Bundled software installed  
Licensed software installed  
Application running when a failure  
occurred  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-4 Product Configuration Record Table  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

MSi Computer Hardware G52 M7031X1 User Manual
Nady Systems Speaker System PCS 12 User Manual
NEC Car Stereo System CDC TO3 User Manual
NEC Video Game Controller nec User Manual
NETGEAR Network Router DG834Gv5 User Manual
New Holland Compact Loader L150 User Manual
Nikon Camcorder ED 120 User Manual
Olympus DVR W 10 User Manual
Oregon Scientific Laptop 300102544 00001 10 User Manual
Panasonic Personal Computer FZG1AABACRM User Manual